(3771,2,'2017-09-07 05:34:26','2017-09-07 12:34:26','<center><iframe src=\"https://player.vimeo.com/video/232371300\" width=\"960\" height=\"540\" frameborder=\"0\" allowfullscreen=\"allowfullscreen\"></iframe></center>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232371300/2e544bb7c3\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Download Video</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: left;\">Throughout this video series, watch and draw along with me as I take you step-by-step through a realistic graphite drawing of helping hands from start to finish.</p>\r\n\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3718\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"600\"]<img class=\"wp-image-3718 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/08/helping-hands-post-ref.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"425\" /> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/sqback_info\">Jakub Krechowicz</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[one_half]\r\n<h2 style=\"text-align: center;\"><span style=\"color: #000000;\">Helping Hands Video Series</span></h2>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">[divider style=\"solid\" top=\"20\" bottom=\"20\"]</p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><strong>Part 1</strong></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-2/\">Part 2</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-3/\">Part 3</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-4/\">Part 4</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">Part 5</p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">Part 6</p>\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[/one_half][one_half_last]\r\n\r\nIn this <strong>third video session</strong> of the series, we will:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>Continue adding tones to the fingers of the right hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232371300/2e544bb7c3#t=02m50s\">02:50</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Add tones to the fingers of the left hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232371300/2e544bb7c3#t=54m45s\">54:45</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Add tones to the thumb of the right hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232371300/2e544bb7c3#t=1h09m20s\">1:09:20</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Add tones to the right arm.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232371300/2e544bb7c3#t=1h23m47s\">1:23:47</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Add tones to the background.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232371300/2e544bb7c3#t=1h36m11s\">1:36:11</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Tip</span>: Click on one of the times above, and then click the Play button to jump to that part of the video.\r\n\r\n[/one_half_last]\r\n<h2>Materials and Resources</h2>\r\nThe following materials and resources are introduced or used during this video session. If you do not have everything listed here, do not let that stop you from drawing! You can always get started with what you do have and improvise for what you don\'t have.\r\n\r\nWhen you are ready to get new materials and resources, feel free to make use of the links below. Some of the links below are affiliate links (meaning I will get a tiny commission if you purchase). Another option is to just pick them up at your local art supply store or other applicable retail store.\r\n\r\n[box type=\"info\" align=\"aligncenter\" class=\"\" width=\"\"]\r\n\r\n[one_half]<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Materials</span>:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/light-box/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Light box</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Drawing of Helping Hands from last video</li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/graphite-pencils/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">2B graphite pencil</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/kneaded-eraser/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Kneaded eraser</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[/one_half]\r\n\r\n[one_half_last]<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Resources</span>:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/#res3619261\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Dreamstime.com</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/photoshop-elements/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Adobe Photoshop Elements</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands.jpg\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Helping Hands reference photograph</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands-grid.jpg\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Helping Hands reference photograph with grid</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands-grid.pdf\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Grid paper for light box</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[/one_half_last]\r\n\r\n[/box]','Helping Hands - Part 3','','inherit','closed','closed','','3726-revision-v1','','','2017-09-07 05:34:26','2017-09-07 12:34:26','',3726,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3726-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3772,2,'2017-09-07 05:41:34','2017-09-07 12:41:34','<center><iframe src=\"https://player.vimeo.com/video/229701862\" width=\"960\" height=\"540\" frameborder=\"0\" allowfullscreen=\"allowfullscreen\"></iframe></center>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/229701862/b6c161d189\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Download Video</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: left;\">Throughout this video series, watch and draw along with me as I take you step-by-step through a realistic graphite drawing of helping hands from start to finish.</p>\r\n\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3718\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"600\"]<img class=\"wp-image-3718 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/08/helping-hands-post-ref.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"425\" /> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/sqback_info\">Jakub Krechowicz</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[one_half]\r\n<h2 style=\"text-align: center;\"><span style=\"color: #000000;\">Helping Hands Video Series</span></h2>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">[divider style=\"solid\" top=\"20\" bottom=\"20\"]</p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><strong>Part 1</strong></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-2/\">Part 2</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-3/\">Part 3</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-4/\">Part 4</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">Part 5</p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">Part 6</p>\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[/one_half][one_half_last]\r\n\r\nIn this <strong>first video session</strong> of the series, we will:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>Discuss selection and preparation of the reference photograph.  00:17</li>\r\n 	<li>Apply a grid to the reference photograph.  01:34</li>\r\n 	<li>Prepare a grid for our drawing paper.  05:52</li>\r\n 	<li>Discuss copyright and proper use of the reference photograph.</li>\r\n 	<li>Briefly discuss switching between the reference photo and the video during the series.</li>\r\n 	<li>Discuss the materials we plan to use throughout the entire Helping Hands series.</li>\r\n 	<li>Draw the outline of the fingers of the right hand.</li>\r\n 	<li>Draw the outline of the fingers of the left hand.</li>\r\n 	<li>Complete the outline of the hands and arm.</li>\r\n 	<li>Draw the fingernails.</li>\r\n</ul>\r\n<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Tip</span>: Click on one of the times above, and then click the Play button to jump to that part of the video.\r\n\r\n[/one_half_last]\r\n<h2>Materials and Resources</h2>\r\nThe following materials and resources are introduced or used during this video session. If you do not have everything listed here, do not let that stop you from drawing! You can always get started with what you do have and improvise for what you don\'t have.\r\n\r\nWhen you are ready to get new materials and resources, feel free to make use of the links below. Some of the links below are affiliate links (meaning I will get a tiny commission if you purchase). Another option is to just pick them up at your local art supply store or other applicable retail store.\r\n\r\n[box type=\"info\" align=\"aligncenter\" class=\"\" width=\"\"]\r\n\r\n[one_half]<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Materials</span>:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/light-box/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Light box</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/artist-tape/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Low tack artist tape</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/bristol-board-paper/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">8\" x 10\" Bristol board paper (smooth)</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/graphite-pencils/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">HB, 2B, and 4B graphite pencils</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/plastic-eraser/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Plastic eraser</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/kneaded-eraser/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Kneaded eraser</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/tortillions/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Tortillions</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/blending-stumps/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Blending stump</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/dusting-brush/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Art dusting brush</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[/one_half]\r\n\r\n[one_half_last]<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Resources</span>:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/#res3619261\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Dreamstime.com</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/photoshop-elements/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Adobe Photoshop Elements</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/ms-office/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Microsoft Word (from Microsoft Office)</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands.jpg\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Helping Hands reference photograph</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands-grid.jpg\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Helping Hands reference photograph with grid</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands-grid.pdf\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Grid paper for light box</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[/one_half_last]\r\n\r\n[/box]','Helping Hands - Part 1','','inherit','closed','closed','','3715-revision-v1','','','2017-09-07 05:41:34','2017-09-07 12:41:34','',3715,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3715-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3773,2,'2017-09-07 20:10:08','2017-09-08 03:10:08','<center><iframe src=\"https://player.vimeo.com/video/229701862\" width=\"960\" height=\"540\" frameborder=\"0\" allowfullscreen=\"allowfullscreen\"></iframe></center>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/229701862/b6c161d189\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Download Video</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: left;\">Throughout this video series, watch and draw along with me as I take you step-by-step through a realistic graphite drawing of helping hands from start to finish.</p>\r\n\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3718\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"600\"]<img class=\"wp-image-3718 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/08/helping-hands-post-ref.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"425\" /> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/sqback_info\">Jakub Krechowicz</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[one_half]\r\n<h2 style=\"text-align: center;\"><span style=\"color: #000000;\">Helping Hands Video Series</span></h2>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">[divider style=\"solid\" top=\"20\" bottom=\"20\"]</p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><strong>Part 1</strong></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-2/\">Part 2</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-3/\">Part 3</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-4/\">Part 4</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">Part 5</p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">Part 6</p>\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[/one_half][one_half_last]\r\n\r\nIn this <strong>first video session</strong> of the series, we will:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>Discuss selection and preparation of the reference photograph.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/229701862/b6c161d189#t=00m17s\">00:17</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Apply a grid to the reference photograph.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/229701862/b6c161d189#t=01m34s\">01:34</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Prepare a grid for our drawing paper.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/229701862/b6c161d189#t=05m52s\">05:52</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Discuss copyright and proper use of the reference photograph.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/229701862/b6c161d189#t=16m26s\">16:26</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Briefly discuss switching between the reference photo and the video during the series.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/229701862/b6c161d189#t=17m03s\">17:03</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Discuss the materials we plan to use throughout the entire Helping Hands series.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/229701862/b6c161d189#t=18m07s\">18:07</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Draw the outline of the fingers of the right hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/229701862/b6c161d189#t=30m18s\">30:18</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Draw the outline of the fingers of the left hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/229701862/b6c161d189#t=47m25s\">47:25</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Complete the outline of the hands and arm.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/229701862/b6c161d189#t=56m00s\">56:00</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Draw the fingernails.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/229701862/b6c161d189#t=1h02m41s\">1:02:41</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Tip</span>: Click on one of the times above, and then click the Play button to jump to that part of the video.\r\n\r\n[/one_half_last]\r\n<h2>Materials and Resources</h2>\r\nThe following materials and resources are introduced or used during this video session. If you do not have everything listed here, do not let that stop you from drawing! You can always get started with what you do have and improvise for what you don\'t have.\r\n\r\nWhen you are ready to get new materials and resources, feel free to make use of the links below. Some of the links below are affiliate links (meaning I will get a tiny commission if you purchase). Another option is to just pick them up at your local art supply store or other applicable retail store.\r\n\r\n[box type=\"info\" align=\"aligncenter\" class=\"\" width=\"\"]\r\n\r\n[one_half]<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Materials</span>:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/light-box/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Light box</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/artist-tape/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Low tack artist tape</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/bristol-board-paper/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">8\" x 10\" Bristol board paper (smooth)</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/graphite-pencils/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">HB, 2B, and 4B graphite pencils</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/plastic-eraser/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Plastic eraser</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/kneaded-eraser/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Kneaded eraser</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/tortillions/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Tortillions</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/blending-stumps/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Blending stump</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/dusting-brush/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Art dusting brush</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[/one_half]\r\n\r\n[one_half_last]<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Resources</span>:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/#res3619261\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Dreamstime.com</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/photoshop-elements/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Adobe Photoshop Elements</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/ms-office/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Microsoft Word (from Microsoft Office)</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands.jpg\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Helping Hands reference photograph</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands-grid.jpg\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Helping Hands reference photograph with grid</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands-grid.pdf\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Grid paper for light box</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[/one_half_last]\r\n\r\n[/box]','Helping Hands - Part 1','','inherit','closed','closed','','3715-revision-v1','','','2017-09-07 20:10:08','2017-09-08 03:10:08','',3715,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3715-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3774,2,'2017-09-07 20:49:50','2017-09-08 03:49:50','<center><iframe src=\"https://player.vimeo.com/video/231485963\" width=\"960\" height=\"540\" frameborder=\"0\" allowfullscreen=\"allowfullscreen\"></iframe></center>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/231485963/79e4b37d74\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Download Video</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: left;\">Throughout this video series, watch and draw along with me as I take you step-by-step through a realistic graphite drawing of helping hands from start to finish.</p>\r\n\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3718\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"600\"]<img class=\"wp-image-3718 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/08/helping-hands-post-ref.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"425\" /> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/sqback_info\">Jakub Krechowicz</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[one_half]\r\n<h2 style=\"text-align: center;\"><span style=\"color: #000000;\">Helping Hands Video Series</span></h2>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">[divider style=\"solid\" top=\"20\" bottom=\"20\"]</p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><strong>Part 1</strong></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-2/\">Part 2</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-3/\">Part 3</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-4/\">Part 4</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">Part 5</p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">Part 6</p>\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[/one_half][one_half_last]\r\n\r\nIn this <strong>second video session</strong> of the series, we will:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>Draw lines and value changes on the wrist and palm of the left hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/231485963/79e4b37d74#t=04m55s\">04:55</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Draw line details on the fingers of the left hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/231485963/79e4b37d74#t=19m35s\">19:35</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Add line details and value changes to the fingers and thumb of the right hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/231485963/79e4b37d74#t=23m00s\">23:00</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Complete the line drawing with value changes on the arm.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/231485963/79e4b37d74#t=48m58s\">48:58</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Discuss possible use of the grid beyond the line drawing stage.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/231485963/79e4b37d74#t=55m30s\">55:30</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Add tones to the palm and wrist of the left hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/231485963/79e4b37d74#t=59m35s\">59:35</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Add tones to the pinky and ring finger of the right hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/231485963/79e4b37d74#t=1h34m18s\">1:34:18</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Tip</span>: Click on one of the times above, and then click the Play button to jump to that part of the video.\r\n\r\n[/one_half_last]\r\n<h2>Materials and Resources</h2>\r\nThe following materials and resources are introduced or used during this video session. If you do not have everything listed here, do not let that stop you from drawing! You can always get started with what you do have and improvise for what you don\'t have.\r\n\r\nWhen you are ready to get new materials and resources, feel free to make use of the links below. Some of the links below are affiliate links (meaning I will get a tiny commission if you purchase). Another option is to just pick them up at your local art supply store or other applicable retail store.\r\n\r\n[box type=\"info\" align=\"aligncenter\" class=\"\" width=\"\"]\r\n\r\n[one_half]<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Materials</span>:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/light-box/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Light box</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/artist-tape/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Low tack artist tape</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Drawing of Helping Hands from last video</li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/graphite-pencils/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">HB and 2B graphite pencils</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[/one_half]\r\n\r\n[one_half_last]<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Resources</span>:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/#res3619261\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Dreamstime.com</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/photoshop-elements/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Adobe Photoshop Elements</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands.jpg\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Helping Hands reference photograph</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands-grid.jpg\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Helping Hands reference photograph with grid</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands-grid.pdf\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Grid paper for light box</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[/one_half_last]\r\n\r\n[/box]','Helping Hands - Part 2','','inherit','closed','closed','','3724-revision-v1','','','2017-09-07 20:49:50','2017-09-08 03:49:50','',3724,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3724-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3775,2,'2017-09-08 05:05:57','2017-09-08 12:05:57','<center><iframe src=\"https://player.vimeo.com/video/232601475\" width=\"960\" height=\"540\" frameborder=\"0\" allowfullscreen=\"allowfullscreen\"></iframe></center>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232601475/266bc42275\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Download Video</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: left;\">Throughout this video series, watch and draw along with me as I take you step-by-step through a realistic graphite drawing of helping hands from start to finish.</p>\r\n\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3718\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"600\"]<img class=\"wp-image-3718 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/08/helping-hands-post-ref.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"425\" /> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/sqback_info\">Jakub Krechowicz</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[one_half]\r\n<h2 style=\"text-align: center;\"><span style=\"color: #000000;\">Helping Hands Video Series</span></h2>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">[divider style=\"solid\" top=\"20\" bottom=\"20\"]</p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><strong>Part 1</strong></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-2/\">Part 2</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-3/\">Part 3</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-4/\">Part 4</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">Part 5</p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">Part 6</p>\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[/one_half][one_half_last]\r\n\r\nIn this <strong>fourth</strong><strong> video session</strong> of the series, we will:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>Blend the tones of the wrist, palm, and thumb of the left hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232601475/266bc42275#t=03m40s\">03:40</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Blend the tones of the fingers of the left hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232601475/266bc42275#t=16m38s\">16:38</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Blend the tones of the right hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232601475/266bc42275#t=22m00s\">22:00</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Blend the tones of the right arm.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232601475/266bc42275#t=48m30s\">48:30</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Blend the tones of the background.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232601475/266bc42275#t=52m40s\">52:40</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Layer details onto the wrist, palm, and thumb of the left hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232601475/266bc42275#t=57m30s\">57:30</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Add value to the background behind the left hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232601475/266bc42275#t=1h49m15s\">1:49:15</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Tip</span>: Click on one of the times above, and then click the Play button to jump to that part of the video.\r\n\r\n[/one_half_last]\r\n<h2>Materials and Resources</h2>\r\nThe following materials and resources are introduced or used during this video session. If you do not have everything listed here, do not let that stop you from drawing! You can always get started with what you do have and improvise for what you don\'t have.\r\n\r\nWhen you are ready to get new materials and resources, feel free to make use of the links below. Some of the links below are affiliate links (meaning I will get a tiny commission if you purchase). Another option is to just pick them up at your local art supply store or other applicable retail store.\r\n\r\n[box type=\"info\" align=\"aligncenter\" class=\"\" width=\"\"]\r\n\r\n[one_half]<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Materials</span>:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/light-box/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Light box</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Drawing of Helping Hands from last video</li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/graphite-pencils/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">2B graphite pencil</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/kneaded-eraser/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Kneaded eraser</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/tortillions/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Tortillions</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/blending-stumps/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Blending stump</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[/one_half]\r\n\r\n[one_half_last]<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Resources</span>:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/#res3619261\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Dreamstime.com</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/photoshop-elements/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Adobe Photoshop Elements</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands.jpg\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Helping Hands reference photograph</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands-grid.jpg\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Helping Hands reference photograph with grid</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands-grid.pdf\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Grid paper for light box</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[/one_half_last]\r\n\r\n[/box]','Helping Hands - Part 4','','inherit','closed','closed','','3728-revision-v1','','','2017-09-08 05:05:57','2017-09-08 12:05:57','',3728,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3728-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3776,2,'2017-09-08 05:19:24','2017-09-08 12:19:24','<center><iframe src=\"https://player.vimeo.com/video/232601475\" width=\"960\" height=\"540\" frameborder=\"0\" allowfullscreen=\"allowfullscreen\"></iframe></center>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232601475/266bc42275\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Download Video</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: left;\">Throughout this video series, watch and draw along with me as I take you step-by-step through a realistic graphite drawing of helping hands from start to finish.</p>\r\n\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3718\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"600\"]<img class=\"wp-image-3718 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/08/helping-hands-post-ref.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"425\" /> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/sqback_info\">Jakub Krechowicz</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[one_half]\r\n<h2 style=\"text-align: center;\"><span style=\"color: #000000;\">Helping Hands Video Series</span></h2>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">[divider style=\"solid\" top=\"20\" bottom=\"20\"]</p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-1/\">Part 1</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-2/\">Part 2</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-3/\">Part 3</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><strong>Part 4</strong></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">Part 5</p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">Part 6</p>\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[/one_half][one_half_last]\r\n\r\nIn this <strong>fourth</strong><strong> video session</strong> of the series, we will:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>Blend the tones of the wrist, palm, and thumb of the left hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232601475/266bc42275#t=03m40s\">03:40</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Blend the tones of the fingers of the left hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232601475/266bc42275#t=16m38s\">16:38</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Blend the tones of the right hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232601475/266bc42275#t=22m00s\">22:00</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Blend the tones of the right arm.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232601475/266bc42275#t=48m30s\">48:30</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Blend the tones of the background.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232601475/266bc42275#t=52m40s\">52:40</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Layer details onto the wrist, palm, and thumb of the left hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232601475/266bc42275#t=57m30s\">57:30</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Add value to the background behind the left hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232601475/266bc42275#t=1h49m15s\">1:49:15</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Tip</span>: Click on one of the times above, and then click the Play button to jump to that part of the video.\r\n\r\n[/one_half_last]\r\n<h2>Materials and Resources</h2>\r\nThe following materials and resources are introduced or used during this video session. If you do not have everything listed here, do not let that stop you from drawing! You can always get started with what you do have and improvise for what you don\'t have.\r\n\r\nWhen you are ready to get new materials and resources, feel free to make use of the links below. Some of the links below are affiliate links (meaning I will get a tiny commission if you purchase). Another option is to just pick them up at your local art supply store or other applicable retail store.\r\n\r\n[box type=\"info\" align=\"aligncenter\" class=\"\" width=\"\"]\r\n\r\n[one_half]<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Materials</span>:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/light-box/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Light box</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Drawing of Helping Hands from last video</li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/graphite-pencils/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">2B graphite pencil</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/kneaded-eraser/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Kneaded eraser</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/tortillions/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Tortillions</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/blending-stumps/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Blending stump</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[/one_half]\r\n\r\n[one_half_last]<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Resources</span>:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/#res3619261\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Dreamstime.com</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/photoshop-elements/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Adobe Photoshop Elements</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands.jpg\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Helping Hands reference photograph</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands-grid.jpg\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Helping Hands reference photograph with grid</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands-grid.pdf\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Grid paper for light box</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[/one_half_last]\r\n\r\n[/box]','Helping Hands - Part 4','','inherit','closed','closed','','3728-revision-v1','','','2017-09-08 05:19:24','2017-09-08 12:19:24','',3728,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3728-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3777,2,'2017-09-08 05:23:43','2017-09-08 12:23:43','<center><iframe src=\"https://player.vimeo.com/video/231485963\" width=\"960\" height=\"540\" frameborder=\"0\" allowfullscreen=\"allowfullscreen\"></iframe></center>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/231485963/79e4b37d74\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Download Video</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: left;\">Throughout this video series, watch and draw along with me as I take you step-by-step through a realistic graphite drawing of helping hands from start to finish.</p>\r\n\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3718\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"600\"]<img class=\"wp-image-3718 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/08/helping-hands-post-ref.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"425\" /> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/sqback_info\">Jakub Krechowicz</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[one_half]\r\n<h2 style=\"text-align: center;\"><span style=\"color: #000000;\">Helping Hands Video Series</span></h2>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">[divider style=\"solid\" top=\"20\" bottom=\"20\"]</p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-1/\">Part 1</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><strong>Part 2</strong></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-3/\">Part 3</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-4/\">Part 4</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">Part 5</p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">Part 6</p>\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[/one_half][one_half_last]\r\n\r\nIn this <strong>second video session</strong> of the series, we will:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>Draw lines and value changes on the wrist and palm of the left hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/231485963/79e4b37d74#t=04m55s\">04:55</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Draw line details on the fingers of the left hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/231485963/79e4b37d74#t=19m35s\">19:35</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Add line details and value changes to the fingers and thumb of the right hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/231485963/79e4b37d74#t=23m00s\">23:00</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Complete the line drawing with value changes on the arm.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/231485963/79e4b37d74#t=48m58s\">48:58</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Discuss possible use of the grid beyond the line drawing stage.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/231485963/79e4b37d74#t=55m30s\">55:30</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Add tones to the palm and wrist of the left hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/231485963/79e4b37d74#t=59m35s\">59:35</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Add tones to the pinky and ring finger of the right hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/231485963/79e4b37d74#t=1h34m18s\">1:34:18</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Tip</span>: Click on one of the times above, and then click the Play button to jump to that part of the video.\r\n\r\n[/one_half_last]\r\n<h2>Materials and Resources</h2>\r\nThe following materials and resources are introduced or used during this video session. If you do not have everything listed here, do not let that stop you from drawing! You can always get started with what you do have and improvise for what you don\'t have.\r\n\r\nWhen you are ready to get new materials and resources, feel free to make use of the links below. Some of the links below are affiliate links (meaning I will get a tiny commission if you purchase). Another option is to just pick them up at your local art supply store or other applicable retail store.\r\n\r\n[box type=\"info\" align=\"aligncenter\" class=\"\" width=\"\"]\r\n\r\n[one_half]<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Materials</span>:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/light-box/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Light box</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/artist-tape/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Low tack artist tape</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Drawing of Helping Hands from last video</li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/graphite-pencils/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">HB and 2B graphite pencils</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[/one_half]\r\n\r\n[one_half_last]<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Resources</span>:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/#res3619261\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Dreamstime.com</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/photoshop-elements/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Adobe Photoshop Elements</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands.jpg\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Helping Hands reference photograph</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands-grid.jpg\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Helping Hands reference photograph with grid</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands-grid.pdf\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Grid paper for light box</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[/one_half_last]\r\n\r\n[/box]','Helping Hands - Part 2','','inherit','closed','closed','','3724-revision-v1','','','2017-09-08 05:23:43','2017-09-08 12:23:43','',3724,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3724-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3778,2,'2017-09-08 05:24:50','2017-09-08 12:24:50','<center><iframe src=\"https://player.vimeo.com/video/232371300\" width=\"960\" height=\"540\" frameborder=\"0\" allowfullscreen=\"allowfullscreen\"></iframe></center>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232371300/2e544bb7c3\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Download Video</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: left;\">Throughout this video series, watch and draw along with me as I take you step-by-step through a realistic graphite drawing of helping hands from start to finish.</p>\r\n\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3718\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"600\"]<img class=\"wp-image-3718 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/08/helping-hands-post-ref.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"425\" /> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/sqback_info\">Jakub Krechowicz</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[one_half]\r\n<h2 style=\"text-align: center;\"><span style=\"color: #000000;\">Helping Hands Video Series</span></h2>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">[divider style=\"solid\" top=\"20\" bottom=\"20\"]</p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-1/\">Part 1</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-2/\">Part 2</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><strong>Part 3</strong></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/helping-hands-part-4/\">Part 4</a></p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">Part 5</p>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\">Part 6</p>\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[/one_half][one_half_last]\r\n\r\nIn this <strong>third video session</strong> of the series, we will:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>Continue adding tones to the fingers of the right hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232371300/2e544bb7c3#t=02m50s\">02:50</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Add tones to the fingers of the left hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232371300/2e544bb7c3#t=54m45s\">54:45</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Add tones to the thumb of the right hand.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232371300/2e544bb7c3#t=1h09m20s\">1:09:20</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Add tones to the right arm.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232371300/2e544bb7c3#t=1h23m47s\">1:23:47</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Add tones to the background.  <a href=\"https://vimeo.com/user12844418/review/232371300/2e544bb7c3#t=1h36m11s\">1:36:11</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Tip</span>: Click on one of the times above, and then click the Play button to jump to that part of the video.\r\n\r\n[/one_half_last]\r\n<h2>Materials and Resources</h2>\r\nThe following materials and resources are introduced or used during this video session. If you do not have everything listed here, do not let that stop you from drawing! You can always get started with what you do have and improvise for what you don\'t have.\r\n\r\nWhen you are ready to get new materials and resources, feel free to make use of the links below. Some of the links below are affiliate links (meaning I will get a tiny commission if you purchase). Another option is to just pick them up at your local art supply store or other applicable retail store.\r\n\r\n[box type=\"info\" align=\"aligncenter\" class=\"\" width=\"\"]\r\n\r\n[one_half]<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Materials</span>:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/light-box/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Light box</a></li>\r\n 	<li>Drawing of Helping Hands from last video</li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/graphite-pencils/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">2B graphite pencil</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/kneaded-eraser/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Kneaded eraser</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[/one_half]\r\n\r\n[one_half_last]<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Resources</span>:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/#res3619261\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Dreamstime.com</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/photoshop-elements/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener noreferrer\">Adobe Photoshop Elements</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands.jpg\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Helping Hands reference photograph</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands-grid.jpg\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Helping Hands reference photograph with grid</a></li>\r\n 	<li><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/helping-hands-grid.pdf\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">Grid paper for light box</a></li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[/one_half_last]\r\n\r\n[/box]','Helping Hands - Part 3','','inherit','closed','closed','','3726-revision-v1','','','2017-09-08 05:24:50','2017-09-08 12:24:50','',3726,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3726-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3780,2,'2017-09-09 20:41:24','2017-09-10 03:41:24','Welcome! Here you will find a collection of video series containing full-length, step-by-step tutorials for drawing people. Each series shows you every pencil stroke of a drawing from start to finish with thorough explanations.\r\n\r\nTo get the maximum benefit from this collection, choose a series to watch and draw along with me as I take you step-by-step through the entire drawing. Take your time and work at your own pace. Pause as needed, and pick up where you left off. There is so much to be learned by applying so much time and practice to a single drawing! After you finish one series, choose another series and do it all again!\r\n\r\nAlternatively, if you have certain trouble spots with portrait drawing in general, scan the images below and select one with features similar to what you are trying to achieve. Each image below is the final result of that stage of the drawing. Each video is accompanied with a description of what you can find covered in that video, so you should have no trouble finding the help you need.\r\n\r\nCome back here often. Videos are typically added once a week, and the variety of subject matter will continue to expand!\r\n\r\n[divider style=\"solid\" top=\"20\" bottom=\"20\"]\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/06/Ann-series.jpg\"><img class=\"alignleft wp-image-3730 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/06/Ann-series-240x300.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"240\" height=\"300\" /></a>\r\n<h2>\"Ann\"</h2>\r\nThis video series shows you how to achieve a realistic graphite pencil portrait of a woman we call \"Ann\". We make use of the grid method with a light box and a mechanical pencil.\r\n\r\nTOTAL RUNNING TIME: 16 hours, 20 minutes\r\n\r\n[gallery size=\"full\" columns=\"4\" ids=\"3482,3560,3586,3589,3678,3680,3682,3684\"]','Full-Length Video Tutorials','','inherit','closed','closed','','3592-revision-v1','','','2017-09-09 20:41:24','2017-09-10 03:41:24','',3592,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3592-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3783,2,'2017-09-25 04:42:24','2017-09-25 11:42:24','The content you\'re trying to view is only available for members of the Let\'s Draw People Club. Please join in order to access this content.','Oops! This Content is Members Only','','inherit','closed','closed','','3475-autosave-v1','','','2017-09-25 04:42:24','2017-09-25 11:42:24','',3475,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3475-autosave-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3784,2,'2017-09-25 04:43:18','2017-09-25 11:43:18','The content you\'re trying to view is only available for members of the <strong>Let\'s Draw People Club</strong>. Please <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/club/\">join</a> in order to access this content.','Oops! This Content is Members Only','','inherit','closed','closed','','3475-revision-v1','','','2017-09-25 04:43:18','2017-09-25 11:43:18','',3475,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3475-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3785,2,'2017-10-04 02:34:59','2017-10-04 09:34:59','If you are new to the world of art and do not know how to use a blending stump, then you have come to the right place.\r\n\r\nThis is a tool that is made up of a cylindrical piece of paper which has been compressed and has a point situated on each end. When I first learned about blending stumps, I did not know that they came in a variety of sizes and had various levels of sharpness. The reason for this is that different images require different blending needs and the variations in sizes and shapes help to provide enhancement to images.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stumps-in-jar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3805\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stumps-in-jar-200x300.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"200\" height=\"300\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThe reason that these stumps have two ends is so that the other can be used when one side becomes dirty. These blending stumps are not so expensive, and a blending stump can easily be replaced or cleaned when it becomes filthy. Keep reading to learn more about how to use this simple but effective tool.\r\n<h2>Creating Realistic Images with a Blending Stump</h2>\r\nMany artists utilize blending stumps to help smudge pencil or charcoal on pieces of paper. I use the stumps to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/simple-drawing-techniques-for-realistic-pencil-portraits/\">create realistic drawings</a> that can be used to drag the graphite across paper. This helps to develop a fine layer of graphite that will reflect light.\r\n\r\nBlending stumps come in handy when it comes to creating graduated highlights such as differences in strands of hair, creating an eye, or even <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/take-the-stress-out-of-shading-with-these-pencil-shading-techniques/\">shading a drawing</a>. I as an artist use it in the blending of backgrounds and textures, to sharpen images, to draw with like a pencil (with the excess graphite accumulated), and even erase highlights as needed.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stump-to-shade-background.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3806\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stump-to-shade-background.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n<h3>Blended Shading Technique</h3>\r\nThis is a widely used method that is applied by numerous pencil artists. Graphite is a popular medium used in this technique because it is easy to work with. It is simple to lay down the graphite and use a blending stump to create almost anything.\r\n\r\nI have had excellent results in terms of creating facial images with this technique. What you can do is play around with the blending stump to create different types of shades and textures. If you are just now learning how to draw people, then while creating a facial image make sure that you use smooth shading. This helps to develop flawless and gorgeous appearing skin.\r\n<h3>Circulism Technique</h3>\r\nThis is a widely used shading method which uses a blending stump to create small circles. I think that blending with this method is quite meticulous, but the end results are always worth it. It is excellent for creating realistic skin and can allow you to develop light and dark tones.\r\n<h3>Creating Dark Black Images</h3>\r\nDeveloping dark black images can be troublesome for many people, but when you have a blending stump you cannot go wrong. If you would like to create a dark black image, use charcoal or a sharp pencil so that you can easily blend with the stump later on. When dealing with a dark tone you will always get a shine as the end result. This occurs because the paper tends to absorb graphite developing a realistic image.\r\n<h3>Loose and Tight Crosshatching</h3>\r\nThe main purpose of crosshatching is to create overlapping lines. To begin you must draw overlapping lines that will overlap the first set. Do this many times to create tones to shade later on. You can develop crosshatching to be tight or loose depending on your needs and the type of image you are creating.\r\n\r\nIf you just so happen to be drawing a portrait of a person with a beloved pet, keep in mind that loose crosshatching comes in handy for the fur, because there are some sections of fur that are wider than the others. After creating the lines, a blending stump can be used to shade in the areas slowly and develop a connection though blending.\r\n<h2>Methods on How to Use a Blending Stump</h2>\r\n<h3>Smudging in Circular Motions</h3>\r\nUse the end of the stub to create a variety of elements in your drawings. The way I do this is by using small circular motions, which allow me to add depth to images to create a realistic feel.\r\n<h3>Blending of Shades and Tones</h3>\r\nUse a clean blending stump to smear the graphite in a forward and backward motion so that you can add depth to your image. The purpose of this is to make sure that the tones and shades are blended together evenly. When you do this, do not worry and be calm because it may take a bit long, but when you see the finished image you are bound to be pleased with your efforts.\r\n<h3>Dark Value Images for a Smooth Finish</h3>\r\nIf you would like to achieve a nice dark value image while utilizing the blending stump, then look for the white dots between the graphite. When you see the grooves in the paper, add dark values. At this time use a blending stump to spread the graphite and fill in the grooves. This will add a smooth finish to the drawing.\r\n<h3>Light Value Images to Add Depth</h3>\r\nIn order to create light value images, it is essential to make sure that the blending stump is clean during the process. When creating a light value image, sand the stump a couple of times as you blend. This will keep it tidy and add depth to your image almost instantaneously.\r\n<h2>Difference Between Blending Stumps and Tortillions</h2>\r\nSome beginning artists have a difficult time when it comes to choosing to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/blending-stumps/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">buy a blending stump</a> or a tortillion. The reason for this is that both of them are different tools that help to create similar effects. If you know how to use each of these tools properly, you will be able to develop a flawless drawing or sketch that will stand out and look exactly how you would like it to look, regardless of which tool you use.\r\n\r\nWhen it comes to appearance, both of these tools resemble each other. They are both made out of paper and artists use them in terms of blending graphite and pastel. The main difference has to do with the paper weight and size.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stump-and-tortillion.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3807\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stump-and-tortillion.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"311\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThe blending stumps are a lot larger in size and have points on both ends for the convenience of users. With the blending stump, you do not have to get another one when one side becomes ruined. What you can do is use the other end. The tortillions are a lot shorter and have one point at the tip. What this does is helps to create precise images.\r\n\r\nPersonally, I typically use blending stumps to blend large areas with broad strokes. I use tortillions to blend smaller, tight areas. These small areas can be blended with a blending stump as well. In many ways, deciding between a blending stump and a tortillion boils down to personal preference.\r\n<h2>Some Tips to Blending Pencil with a Stump</h2>\r\nIf you plan on shading with pencil, you will need a blending tool such as a blending stump or even a tortillion. Below are some tips that will help you during the blending process:\r\n<ol>\r\n 	<li>Whenever I use a blending stump, I usually go in side-to-side or circular motions, consistent with the pencil strokes. This allows me to keep the shading nice and controlled.</li>\r\n 	<li>I hold the blending tool in a downward direction to help adjust the pressure that I must use on it. I believe this is a great technique that will allow you to gain control of the tool and develop a wonderful image.</li>\r\n 	<li>Remember that graphite has the tendency to stick to the blending tool. Being aware of this and how you applied your tones on the paper will determine whether you should shade from light to dark or dark to light. If you’re just blending graphite, blend light to dark. If you want to use the graphite accumulated on your blending stump to add tones to some lighter areas and even draw in light details, blend dark to light.</li>\r\n</ol>\r\n<h2>Cleaning a Blending Stump</h2>\r\nIf you want to try to keep the life of your blending stump as long as possible, then I will provide you with some advice on how to do so. Make sure that you have all these items and follow the process carefully.\r\n\r\nItems Needed:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>Scissors</li>\r\n 	<li>Sand paper or a nail file</li>\r\n 	<li>A dirty blending stump</li>\r\n</ul>\r\nSteps Involved:\r\n<ol>\r\n 	<li>The first step is to use the sand paper or nail file to slowly and gently rub the edge of the blending stump. This helps to remove excess lead that is present on the stump and make it clear again.</li>\r\n 	<li>After you do this, you will have a clear stump, but you will see that the edges may become frayed and loose pieces of paper may hang out from the sides. Use your scissors to cut these loose pieces off.</li>\r\n 	<li>I suggest that you clean each of the ends once or twice before you actually cut them away. By doing this, the blending stump will last longer and will make blending a lot easier on your part.</li>\r\n</ol>\r\n<h2>Blending Stumps Help to Create Smooth Images</h2>\r\nBlending stumps come in handy for larger areas that need to be blended such as backgrounds, prominent facial features, skin tones and so forth. They can also be used in smaller areas that require detail. Blending stumps add a smooth appearance to the image. When you use this tool, make sure that you use it carefully and in a slow motion.\r\n<h2>Homemade Blending Stump</h2>\r\nIf you are in need of a blending stump and do not want to purchase one, then I have included step-by-step instructions on how to easily make one.\r\n<ol>\r\n 	<li>Select the type of paper that you would like to use in order to make the blending stump. Try to find paper that can be rolled easily and not cause you much of a problem.</li>\r\n 	<li>Make sure that you cut the paper down so that the total length goes from the end of your index finger knuckle to the tip. Make sure that you allow the longer side to be intact as this will provide more paper to roll and lead to a better blending stump.</li>\r\n 	<li>If you have decided to use a hard form of paper (writing paper or copy paper), make some small folds and roll it, but if you note that the paper is soft (tissue or toilet paper) just begin by rolling it.</li>\r\n 	<li>When rolling, make sure that it is done tightly. If you roll it too loose, there is a chance of the stump becoming floppy. Do not make this mistake, as you will not be able to get a grip on it.</li>\r\n 	<li>Roll the stump so that you see only one inch that is left to roll. This is the area where you will create the point.</li>\r\n 	<li>Apply glue on the inside of the inch that you left off and also on the rolled part.</li>\r\n 	<li>Use sharp scissors to cut off the end of the stump so that it is smooth.</li>\r\n 	<li>Get a pencil sharpener to sharpen the side that you have cut so that you can get it to a rough point.</li>\r\n 	<li>Your blending stump is ready to use.</li>\r\n</ol>\r\nWhen you apply these methods and techniques, you will become comfortable using a blending stump in no time. I hope you will take the methods and techniques I have taught you for how to use a blending stump and apply them in the creation of your next image. While using this tool, make sure that you take your time and do not rush into the blending process. If you work your way slowing through the process, then you will get a realistic appearing image which the viewers of your artwork will adore.','How to Use a Blending Stump for Realistic Effects','','publish','open','open','','how-to-use-a-blending-stump-for-realistic-effects','','','2017-10-04 04:47:49','2017-10-04 11:47:49','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/?p=3785',0,'post','',0),(3787,2,'2017-10-01 13:56:52','2017-10-01 20:56:52','If you are new to the world of art and do not know how to use a blending stump, then you have come to the right place.\r\n\r\nThis is a tool that is made up of a cylindrical piece of paper which has been compressed and has a point situated on each end. When I first learned about blending stumps, I did not know that they came in a variety of sizes and had various levels of sharpness. The reason for this is that different images require different blending needs and the variations in sizes and shapes help to provide enhancement to images.\r\n\r\n[in jar]\r\n\r\nThe reason that these stumps have two ends is so that the other can be used when one side becomes dirty. These blending stumps are not so expensive, and a blending stump can easily be replaced or cleaned when it becomes filthy. Keep reading to learn more about how to use this simple but effective tool.\r\n<h2>Creating Realistic Images with a Blending Stump</h2>\r\nMany artists utilize blending stumps to help smudge pencil or charcoal on pieces of paper. I use the stumps to create realistic drawings that can be used to drag the graphite across paper. This helps to develop a fine layer of graphite that will reflect light.\r\n\r\nBlending stumps come in handy when it comes to creating graduated highlights such as differences in strands of hair, creating an eye, or even shading a drawing. I as an artist use it in the blending of backgrounds and textures, to sharpen images, to draw with like a pencil (with the excess graphite accumulated), and even erase highlights as needed.\r\n\r\n[helping hands background]\r\n<h3>Blended Shading Technique</h3>\r\nThis is a widely used method that is applied by numerous pencil artists. Graphite is a popular medium used in this technique because it is easy to work with. It is simple to lay down the graphite and use a blending stump to create almost anything.\r\n\r\nI have had excellent results in terms of creating facial images with this technique. What you can do is play around with the blending stump to create different types of shades and textures. If you are just now learning how to draw people, then while creating a facial image make sure that you use smooth shading. This helps to develop flawless and gorgeous appearing skin.\r\n<h3>Circulism Technique</h3>\r\nThis is a widely used shading method which uses a blending stump to create small circles. I think that blending with this method is quite meticulous, but the end results are always worth it. It is excellent for creating realistic skin and can allow you to develop light and dark tones.\r\n<h3>Creating Dark Black Images</h3>\r\nDeveloping dark black images can be troublesome for many people, but when you have a blending stump you cannot go wrong. If you would like to create a dark black image, use charcoal or a sharp pencil so that you can easily blend with the stump later on. When dealing with a dark tone you will always get a shine as the end result. This occurs because the paper tends to absorb graphite developing a realistic image.\r\n<h3>Loose and Tight Crosshatching</h3>\r\nThe main purpose of crosshatching is to create overlapping lines. To begin you must draw overlapping lines that will overlap the first set. Do this many times to create tones to shade later on. You can develop crosshatching to be tight or loose depending on your needs and the type of image you are creating.\r\n\r\nIf you just so happen to be drawing a portrait of a person with a beloved pet, keep in mind that loose crosshatching comes in handy for the fur, because there are some sections of fur that are wider than the others. After creating the lines, a blending stump can be used to shade in the areas slowly and develop a connection though blending.\r\n<h2>Methods on How to Use a Blending Stump</h2>\r\n<h3>Smudging in Circular Motions</h3>\r\nUse the end of the stub to create a variety of elements in your drawings. The way I do this is by using small circular motions, which allow me to add depth to images to create a realistic feel.\r\n<h3>Blending of Shades and Tones</h3>\r\nUse a clean blending stump to smear the graphite in a forward and backward motion so that you can add depth to your image. The purpose of this is to make sure that the tones and shades are blended together evenly. When you do this, do not worry and be calm because it may take a bit long, but when you see the finished image you are bound to be pleased with your efforts.\r\n<h3>Dark Value Images for a Smooth Finish</h3>\r\nIf you would like to achieve a nice dark value image while utilizing the blending stump, then look for the white dots between the graphite. When you see the grooves in the paper, add dark values. At this time use a blending stump to spread the graphite and fill in the grooves. This will add a smooth finish to the drawing.\r\n<h3>Light Value Images to Add Depth</h3>\r\nIn order to create light value images, it is essential to make sure that the blending stump is clean during the process. When creating a light value image, sand the stump a couple of times as you blend. This will keep it tidy and add depth to your image almost instantaneously.\r\n<h2>Difference Between Blending Stumps and Tortillions</h2>\r\nSome beginning artists have a difficult time when it comes to choosing to buy a blending stump or a tortillion. The reason for this is that both of them are different tools that help to create similar effects. If you know how to use each of these tools properly, you will be able to develop a flawless drawing or sketch that will stand out and look exactly how you would like it to look, regardless of which tool you use.\r\n\r\nWhen it comes to appearance, both of these tools resemble each other. They are both made out of paper and artists use them in terms of blending graphite and pastel. The main difference has to do with the paper weight and size.\r\n\r\n[blending stump and tortillion]\r\n\r\nThe blending stumps are a lot larger in size and have points on both ends for the convenience of users. With the blending stump, you do not have to get another one when one side becomes ruined. What you can do is use the other end. The tortillions are a lot shorter and have one point at the tip. What this does is helps to create precise images.\r\n\r\nPersonally, I typically use blending stumps to blend large areas with broad strokes. I use tortillions to blend smaller, tight areas. These small areas can be blended with a blending stump as well. In many ways, deciding between a blending stump and a tortillion boils down to personal preference.\r\n<h2>Some Tips to Blending Pencil with a Stump</h2>\r\nIf you plan on shading with pencil, you will need a blending tool such as a blending stump or even a tortillion. Below are some tips that will help you during the blending process:\r\n<ol>\r\n 	<li>Whenever I use a blending stump, I usually go in side-to-side or circular motions, consistent with the pencil strokes. This allows me to keep the shading nice and controlled.</li>\r\n 	<li>I hold the blending tool in a downward direction to help adjust the pressure that I must use on it. I believe this is a great technique that will allow you to gain control of the tool and develop a wonderful image.</li>\r\n 	<li>Remember that graphite has the tendency to stick to the blending tool. Being aware of this and how you applied your tones on the paper will determine whether you should shade from light to dark or dark to light. If you’re just blending graphite, blend light to dark. If you want to use the graphite accumulated on your blending stump to add tones to some lighter areas and even draw in light details, blend dark to light.</li>\r\n</ol>\r\n<h2>Cleaning a Blending Stump</h2>\r\nIf you want to try to keep the life of your blending stump as long as possible, then I will provide you with some advice on how to do so. Make sure that you have all these items and follow the process carefully.\r\n\r\nItems Needed:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>Scissors</li>\r\n 	<li>Sand paper or a nail file</li>\r\n 	<li>A dirty blending stump</li>\r\n</ul>\r\nSteps Involved:\r\n<ol>\r\n 	<li>The first step is to use the sand paper or nail file to slowly and gently rub the edge of the blending stump. This helps to remove excess lead that is present on the stump and make it clear again.</li>\r\n 	<li>After you do this, you will have a clear stump, but you will see that the edges may become frayed and loose pieces of paper may hang out from the sides. Use your scissors to cut these loose pieces off.</li>\r\n 	<li>I suggest that you clean each of the ends once or twice before you actually cut them away. By doing this, the blending stump will last longer and will make blending a lot easier on your part.</li>\r\n</ol>\r\n<h2>Blending Stumps Help to Create Smooth Images</h2>\r\nBlending stumps come in handy for larger areas that need to be blended such as backgrounds, prominent facial features, skin tones and so forth. They can also be used in smaller areas that require detail. Blending stumps add a smooth appearance to the image. When you use this tool, make sure that you use it carefully and in a slow motion.\r\n<h2>Homemade Blending Stump</h2>\r\nIf you are in need of a blending stump and do not want to purchase one, then I have included step-by-step instructions on how to easily make one.\r\n<ol>\r\n 	<li>Select the type of paper that you would like to use in order to make the blending stump. Try to find paper that can be rolled easily and not cause you much of a problem.</li>\r\n 	<li>Make sure that you cut the paper down so that the total length goes from the end of your index finger knuckle to the tip. Make sure that you allow the longer side to be intact as this will provide more paper to roll and lead to a better blending stump.</li>\r\n 	<li>If you have decided to use a hard form of paper (writing paper or copy paper), make some small folds and roll it, but if you note that the paper is soft (tissue or toilet paper) just begin by rolling it.</li>\r\n 	<li>When rolling, make sure that it is done tightly. If you roll it too loose, there is a chance of the stump becoming floppy. Do not make this mistake, as you will not be able to get a grip on it.</li>\r\n 	<li>Roll the stump so that you see only one inch that is left to roll. This is the area where you will create the point.</li>\r\n 	<li>Apply glue on the inside of the inch that you left off and also on the rolled part.</li>\r\n 	<li>Use sharp scissors to cut off the end of the stump so that it is smooth.</li>\r\n 	<li>Get a pencil sharpener to sharpen the side that you have cut so that you can get it to a rough point.</li>\r\n 	<li>Your blending stump is ready to use.</li>\r\n</ol>\r\nWhen you apply these methods and techniques, you will become comfortable using a blending stump in no time. I hope you will take the methods and techniques I have taught you for how to use a blending stump and apply them in the creation of your next image. While using this tool, make sure that you take your time and do not rush into the blending process. If you work your way slowing through the process, then you will get a realistic appearing image which the viewers of your artwork will adore.','How to Use a Blending Stump for Realistic Effects','','inherit','closed','closed','','3785-revision-v1','','','2017-10-01 13:56:52','2017-10-01 20:56:52','',3785,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3785-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3786,2,'2017-10-01 13:53:22','2017-10-01 20:53:22','If you are new to the world of art and do not know how to use a blending stump, then you have come to the right place.\r\n\r\nThis is a tool that is made up of a cylindrical piece of paper which has been compressed and has a point situated on each end. When I first learned about blending stumps, I did not know that they came in a variety of sizes and had various levels of sharpness. The reason for this is that different images require different blending needs and the variations in sizes and shapes help to provide enhancement to images.\r\n\r\n[in jar]\r\n\r\nThe reason that these stumps have two ends is so that the other can be used when one side becomes dirty. These blending stumps are not so expensive, and a blending stump can easily be replaced or cleaned when it becomes filthy. Keep reading to learn more about how to use this simple but effective tool.\r\n<h2>Creating Realistic Images with a Blending Stump</h2>\r\nMany artists utilize blending stumps to help smudge pencil or charcoal on pieces of paper. I use the stumps to create realistic drawings that can be used to drag the graphite across paper. This helps to develop a fine layer of graphite that will reflect light.\r\n\r\nBlending stumps come in handy when it comes to creating graduated highlights such as differences in strands of hair, creating an eye, or even shading a drawing. I as an artist use it in the blending of backgrounds and textures, to sharpen images, to draw with like a pencil (with the excess graphite accumulated), and even erase highlights as needed.\r\n\r\n[helping hands background]\r\n<h3>Blended Shading Technique</h3>\r\nThis is a widely used method that is applied by numerous pencil artists. Graphite is a popular medium used in this technique because it is easy to work with. It is simple to lay down the graphite and use a blending stump to create almost anything.\r\n\r\nI have had excellent results in terms of creating facial images with this technique. What you can do is play around with the blending stump to create different types of shades and textures. If you are just now learning how to draw people, then while creating a facial image make sure that you use smooth shading. This helps to develop flawless and gorgeous appearing skin.\r\n<h3>Circulism Technique</h3>\r\nThis is a widely used shading method which uses a blending stump to create small circles. I think that blending with this method is quite meticulous, but the end results are always worth it. It is excellent for creating realistic skin and can allow you to develop light and dark tones.\r\n<h3>Creating Dark Black Images</h3>\r\nDeveloping dark black images can be troublesome for many people, but when you have a blending stump you cannot go wrong. If you would like to create a dark black image, use charcoal or a sharp pencil so that you can easily blend with the stump later on. When dealing with a dark tone you will always get a shine as the end result. This occurs because the paper tends to absorb graphite developing a realistic image.\r\n<h3>Loose and Tight Crosshatching</h3>\r\nThe main purpose of crosshatching is to create overlapping lines. To begin you must draw overlapping lines that will overlap the first set. Do this many times to create tones to shade later on. You can develop crosshatching to be tight or loose depending on your needs and the type of image you are creating.\r\n\r\nIf you just so happen to be drawing a portrait of a person with a beloved pet, keep in mind that loose crosshatching comes in handy for the fur, because there are some sections of fur that are wider than the others. After creating the lines, a blending stump can be used to shade in the areas slowly and develop a connection though blending.\r\n<h2>Methods on How to Use a Blending Stump</h2>\r\n<h3>Smudging in Circular Motions</h3>\r\nUse the end of the stub to create a variety of elements in your drawings. The way I do this is by using small circular motions, which allow me to add depth to images to create a realistic feel.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h3>Blending of Shades and Tones</h3>\r\nUse a clean blending stump to smear the graphite in a forward and backward motion so that you can add depth to your image. The purpose of this is to make sure that the tones and shades are blended together evenly. When you do this, do not worry and be calm because it may take a bit long, but when you see the finished image you are bound to be pleased with your efforts.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h3>Dark Value Images for a Smooth Finish</h3>\r\nIf you would like to achieve a nice dark value image while utilizing the blending stump, then look for the white dots between the graphite. When you see the grooves in the paper, add dark values. At this time use a blending stump to spread the graphite and fill in the grooves. This will add a smooth finish to the drawing.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h3>Light Value Images to Add Depth</h3>\r\nIn order to create light value images, it is essential to make sure that the blending stump is clean during the process. When creating a light value image, sand the stump a couple of times as you blend. This will keep it tidy and add depth to your image almost instantaneously.\r\n<h2>Difference Between Blending Stumps and Tortillions</h2>\r\nSome beginning artists have a difficult time when it comes to choosing to buy a blending stump or a tortillion. The reason for this is that both of them are different tools that help to create similar effects. If you know how to use each of these tools properly, you will be able to develop a flawless drawing or sketch that will stand out and look exactly how you would like it to look, regardless of which tool you use.\r\n\r\nWhen it comes to appearance, both of these tools resemble each other. They are both made out of paper and artists use them in terms of blending graphite and pastel. The main difference has to do with the paper weight and size.\r\n\r\n[blending stump and tortillion]\r\n\r\nThe blending stumps are a lot larger in size and have points on both ends for the convenience of users. With the blending stump, you do not have to get another one when one side becomes ruined. What you can do is use the other end. The tortillions are a lot shorter and have one point at the tip. What this does is helps to create precise images.\r\n\r\nPersonally, I typically use blending stumps to blend large areas with broad strokes. I use tortillions to blend smaller, tight areas. These small areas can be blended with a blending stump as well. In many ways, deciding between a blending stump and a tortillion boils down to personal preference.\r\n<h2>Some Tips to Blending Pencil with a Stump</h2>\r\nIf you plan on shading with pencil, you will need a blending tool such as a blending stump or even a tortillion. Below are some tips that will help you during the blending process:\r\n<ol>\r\n 	<li>Whenever I use a blending stump, I usually go in side-to-side or circular motions, consistent with the pencil strokes. This allows me to keep the shading nice and controlled.</li>\r\n 	<li>I hold the blending tool in a downward direction to help adjust the pressure that I must use on it. I believe this is a great technique that will allow you to gain control of the tool and develop a wonderful image.</li>\r\n 	<li>Remember that graphite has the tendency to stick to the blending tool. Being aware of this and how you applied your tones on the paper will determine whether you should shade from light to dark or dark to light. If you’re just blending graphite, blend light to dark. If you want to use the graphite accumulated on your blending stump to add tones to some lighter areas and even draw in light details, blend dark to light.</li>\r\n</ol>\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Cleaning a Blending Stump</h2>\r\nIf you want to try to keep the life of your blending stump as long as possible, then I will provide you with some advice on how to do so. Make sure that you have all these items and follow the process carefully.\r\n\r\nItems Needed:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>Scissors</li>\r\n 	<li>Sand paper or a nail file</li>\r\n 	<li>A dirty blending stump</li>\r\n</ul>\r\nSteps Involved:\r\n<ol>\r\n 	<li>The first step is to use the sand paper or nail file to slowly and gently rub the edge of the blending stump. This helps to remove excess lead that is present on the stump and make it clear again.</li>\r\n 	<li>After you do this, you will have a clear stump, but you will see that the edges may become frayed and loose pieces of paper may hang out from the sides. Use your scissors to cut these loose pieces off.</li>\r\n 	<li>I suggest that you clean each of the ends once or twice before you actually cut them away. By doing this, the blending stump will last longer and will make blending a lot easier on your part.</li>\r\n</ol>\r\n<h2>Blending Stumps Help to Create Smooth Images</h2>\r\nBlending stumps come in handy for larger areas that need to be blended such as backgrounds, prominent facial features, skin tones and so forth. They can also be used in smaller areas that require detail. Blending stumps add a smooth appearance to the image. When you use this tool, make sure that you use it carefully and in a slow motion.\r\n<h2>Homemade Blending Stump</h2>\r\nIf you are in need of a blending stump and do not want to purchase one, then I have included step-by-step instructions on how to easily make one.\r\n<ol>\r\n 	<li>Select the type of paper that you would like to use in order to make the blending stump. Try to find paper that can be rolled easily and not cause you much of a problem.</li>\r\n 	<li>Make sure that you cut the paper down so that the total length goes from the end of your index finger knuckle to the tip. Make sure that you allow the longer side to be intact as this will provide more paper to roll and lead to a better blending stump.</li>\r\n 	<li>If you have decided to use a hard form of paper (writing paper or copy paper), make some small folds and roll it, but if you note that the paper is soft (tissue or toilet paper) just begin by rolling it.</li>\r\n 	<li>When rolling, make sure that it is done tightly. If you roll it too loose, there is a chance of the stump becoming floppy. Do not make this mistake, as you will not be able to get a grip on it.</li>\r\n 	<li>Roll the stump so that you see only one inch that is left to roll. This is the area where you will create the point.</li>\r\n 	<li>Apply glue on the inside of the inch that you left off and also on the rolled part.</li>\r\n 	<li>Use sharp scissors to cut off the end of the stump so that it is smooth.</li>\r\n 	<li>Get a pencil sharpener to sharpen the side that you have cut so that you can get it to a rough point.</li>\r\n 	<li>Your blending stump is ready to use.</li>\r\n</ol>\r\nWhen you apply these methods and techniques, you will become comfortable using a blending stump in no time. I hope you will take the methods and techniques I have taught you for how to use a blending stump and apply them in the creation of your next image. While using this tool, make sure that you take your time and do not rush into the blending process. If you work your way slowing through the process, then you will get a realistic appearing image which the viewers of your artwork will adore.','How to Use a Blending Stump for Realistic Effects','','inherit','closed','closed','','3785-revision-v1','','','2017-10-01 13:53:22','2017-10-01 20:53:22','',3785,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3785-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3788,2,'2017-07-22 02:48:01','2017-07-22 09:48:01','If you are a fan of singer Selena Gomez, then you will enjoy this tutorial! Follow along with the following steps to learn how to draw Selena Gomez.\r\n\r\nWe will use the reference photo seen below.\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3834\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"402\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez.jpg\"><img class=\"wp-image-3834 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez-402x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"402\" height=\"600\" /></a> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/starstock_info\">Starstock</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou will need a piece of paper, a pencil, and inspiration of course. For this tutorial we are using Aquarelle paper, which will provide an interesting portrait due to the paper’s thickness and texture. Thick paper is preferred because it is less possible to be torn apart if you use your eraser a lot.\r\n\r\nWe’re using a 2B pencil for this drawing, but for sketching you can also use an HB, B, or any type of H pencil.\r\n<h2>Use Guidelines to Place Facial Features</h2>\r\nStep 1 - Look at the picture and try to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">outline the main parts of the face</a> like the outer oval, eyes, lips, nose, hairline, etc. It will be helpful to try to measure how many times one part of the face can fit in another on your reference photo and then look if your drawing matches it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3810\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline-454x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"454\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThis is a well-known method. For example, <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/keeping-it-simple-the-straight-forward-step-by-step-guide-to-drawing-the-body/\">how many heads fit in the whole adult body</a>? In our case, we might ask how many times the width of the face can fit in its height. The answer would be roughly one and a half times. You can use this method for other parts of the face as well.\r\n\r\nDo not press too hard on your pencil, because in future steps you will need to get rid of some lines.\r\n\r\nStep 2 - Now try to outline the main parts on the inside of the face. Draw rough boxes and guidelines that properly place the eyes, nose, lips, mouth, and hairline. Maybe add a little bit of line to indicate the shoulders as well. You don’t need to worry about them too much for now, since we are primarily concentrating on the face.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3811\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 3 - Observe the reference photo and try to draw the eyes, nose, and lips as closely to the original as possible in those spaces you outlined before.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3812\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Basic Face Outline and Highlight Placement</h2>\r\nStep 4 - Erase those extra guidelines. Carefully reshape the remaining lines as needed so the form more closely matches Selena’s features. Add some tiny lines that serve as extra details. Some examples include lines above the eyes to indicate the upper eyelids, the outline of the irises, and some small lines on the nose.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3813\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 5 - Look closely at the picture and try to draw, lightly pressing on the pencil, those spots that are the most light and shiny on the face. They will need to stay untouched for most of the time.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3814\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 6 - Add some details from the reference photo like the pupils and highlights in the eyes, subtle lines under Selena’s eyes, in the corner of her lips, cheekbone lines, neck and collar lines, etc.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3815\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-457x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"457\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Shading the Eyes</h2>\r\nStep 7 - Now, let’s get into a little more of the details. We can start with the eyebrows. It is important to remember that <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/drawing-eyebrows-like-a-boss/\">eyebrows do not grow randomly</a>. They have their own direction, so try your best to follow it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3816\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 8 - Now let’s draw eyelashes. As said before with the eyebrows, remember that eyelashes follow a certain direction too. From the center of the eye, the direction changes to the opposite one. Now you can press harder on the pencil, since the harder you press, the darker the value will be. Selena’s eyelashes need to be very dark.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3817\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3818\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 9 - Now start <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-an-eye-realistically-part-2-of-4/\">shading the eyes</a>. Add value to the iris of each eye. Also darken the pupils of the eyes, as pupils should be very dark.\r\n\r\nAdditionally, it is slightly darker along the upper part of the whites of the eyes where the upper eyelids cast a shadow below. Do not press too hard on the pencil for this shading.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3819\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Shading the Nose</h2>\r\nStep 10 - Shade Selena’s nose, avoiding the white parts you outlined before. Press lightly on the pencil, and try to make strokes all in the same direction.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3820\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 11 - Now layer more shading onto the nose. Try to imitate with strokes the direction and angles of different nose parts.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3821\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows-440x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"440\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Shading the Lips</h2>\r\nStep 12 - Repeat Step 10 but shading the lips.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3822\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 13 - Repeat Step 11 but shading the lips. Now you can press harder since lips are darker in value. You can now use pencils like 3B, 4B, 5B and so on. For the example presented in this tutorial, we will use the same pencil (2B) just to show that if you do not have a lot of pencils it is not a problem. Use an eraser to create white shiny parts, imitating lip gloss.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3823\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Shading the Face</h2>\r\nStep 14 - Next, shade Selena’s entire face, avoiding white outlined spots.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3824\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 15 - Now it is getting a little trickier. You’ll have to observe with attention the shading on your reference photo and try to put shading on the same spots. Still try not to press too hard on your pencil.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3825\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nIf you have a hard time following the shading on a colored reference photograph, just turn it black and white in any photo editing program. It is important also to put a paper handkerchief or a piece of paper under you drawing hand so as to not smudge your already existing shading and create a mess.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 16 - Continue shading on the other side of the face as well. After you are done, try with light strokes to create a gradient passage from shaded parts to those outlined white spots. Doing so will ensure they won’t stand out as much and will seem more realistic.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3826\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair-444x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"444\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Shading the Hair</h2>\r\nStep 17 - Shade the hair, pressing harder on the pencil but not too hard.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3827\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 18 - Imitate shades on the reference photograph.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3829\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nDo not use straight harsh strokes. Instead use curved strokes that imitate the curvature of hair, as seen below. You may wish to use another type of pencil, as mentioned in Step 13.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3828 size-thumbnail\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks-150x150.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"150\" height=\"150\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 19 - Finish shading Selena’s hair. Leave some of the lesser dark parts untouched in some places to imitate shiny, healthy hair. Draw loose strands of hair along the outer edges and along the hairline.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3830\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Completing the Portrait</h2>\r\nStep 20 - Shade the rest of the body with light strokes, using the same pencil that was used for the facial skin tones.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3831\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 21 - Shade the collarbone and other darker parts, always trying to change stroke direction and inclination according to the reference photo. Add details like moles and use an eraser to pull out highlights as needed.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3832\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nLook over your drawing for any necessary fine-tuning or finishing touches. Carefully brush away any residue left behind on your drawing from your eraser.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3833\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-447x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"447\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nAt this point, your drawing should be complete! Hopefully you found this tutorial on how to draw Selena Gomez useful. I trust that you will apply some of the tips from this lesson to some of your future drawings.\r\n\r\n<em><strong><span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Note</span>:</strong> I would like to thank artist <strong>Mariia Luzina</strong> for contributing her drawings and tips for this tutorial!</em>','How to Draw Selena Gomez','','publish','open','open','','how-to-draw-selena-gomez','','','2017-10-07 10:52:28','2017-10-07 17:52:28','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/?p=3788',0,'post','',2),(3789,2,'2017-10-01 15:34:54','2017-10-01 22:34:54','If you are a fan of singer Selena Gomez, then you will enjoy this tutorial! Follow along with the following steps to learn how to draw Selena Gomez.\r\n\r\nWe will use the reference photo seen below.\r\n\r\nYou will need a piece of paper, a pencil, and inspiration of course. For this tutorial we are using Aquarelle paper, which will provide an interesting portrait due to the paper’s thickness and texture. Thick paper is preferred because it is less possible to be torn apart if you use your eraser a lot.\r\n\r\nWe’re using a 2B pencil for this drawing, but for sketching you can also use an HB, B, or any type of H pencil.\r\n<h2>Use Guidelines to Place Facial Features</h2>\r\nStep 1 - Look at the picture and try to outline the main parts like the face oval, eyes, lips, nose, hairline, etc. It will be helpful to try to measure how many times one part of the face can fit in another on your reference photo and then look if your drawing matches it.\r\n\r\nThis is a well-known method. For example, how many heads fit in the whole adult body? In our case, we might ask how many times the width of the face can fit in its height. The answer would be roughly one and a half times. You can use this method for other parts of the face as well.\r\n\r\nDo not press too hard on your pencil, because in future steps you will need to get rid of some lines.\r\n\r\nStep 2 - Now try to outline the main parts on the inside of the face. Draw rough boxes and guidelines that properly place the eyes, nose, lips, mouth, and hairline. Maybe add a little bit of line to indicate the shoulders as well. You don’t need to worry about them too much for now, since we are primarily concentrating on the face.\r\n\r\nStep 3 - Observe the reference photo and try to draw the eyes, nose, and lips as closely to the original as possible in those spaces you outlined before.\r\n<h2>Basic Face Outline and Highlight Placement</h2>\r\nStep 4 - Erase those extra guidelines. Carefully reshape the remaining lines as needed so the form more closely matches Selena’s features. Add some tiny lines that serve as extra details. Some examples include lines above the eyes to indicate the upper eyelids, the outline of the irises, and some small lines on the nose.\r\n\r\nStep 5 - Look closely at the picture and try to draw, lightly pressing on the pencil, those spots that are the most light and shiny on the face. They will need to stay untouched for most of the time.\r\n\r\nStep 6 - Add some details from the reference photo like the pupils and highlights in the eyes, subtle lines under Selena’s eyes, in the corner of her lips, cheekbone lines, neck and collar lines, etc.\r\n<h2>Shading the Eyes</h2>\r\nStep 7 - Now, let’s get into a little more of the details. We can start with the eyebrows. It is important to remember that eyebrows do not grow randomly. They have their own direction, so try your best to follow it.\r\n\r\nStep 8 - Now let’s draw eyelashes. As said before with the eyebrows, remember that eyelashes follow a certain direction too. From the center of the eye, the direction changes to the opposite one. Now you can press harder on the pencil, since the harder you press, the darker the value will be. Selena’s eyelashes need to be very dark.\r\n\r\nStep 9 - Now start shading the eyes. Add value to the iris of each eye. Also darken the pupils of the eyes, as pupils should be very dark.\r\n\r\nAdditionally, it is slightly darker along the upper part of the whites of the eyes where the upper eyelids cast a shadow below. Do not press too hard on the pencil for this shading.\r\n<h2>Shading the Nose</h2>\r\nStep 10 - Shade Selena’s nose, avoiding the white parts you outlined before. Press lightly on the pencil, and try to make strokes all in the same direction.\r\n\r\nStep 11 - Now layer more shading onto the nose. Try to imitate with strokes the direction and angles of different nose parts.\r\n<h2>Shading the Lips</h2>\r\nStep 12 - Repeat Step 10 but shading the lips.\r\n\r\nStep 13 - Repeat Step 11 but shading the lips. Now you can press harder since lips are darker in value. You can now use pencils like 3B, 4B, 5B and so on. For the example presented in this tutorial, we will use the same pencil (2B) just to show that if you do not have a lot of pencils it is not a problem. Use an eraser to create white shiny parts, imitating lip gloss.\r\n<h2>Shading the Face</h2>\r\nStep 14 - Next, shade Selena’s entire face, avoiding white outlined spots.\r\n\r\nStep 15 - Now it is getting a little trickier. You’ll have to observe with attention the shading on your reference photo and try to put shading on the same spots. Still try not to press too hard on your pencil.\r\n\r\nIf you have a hard time following the shading on a colored reference photograph, just turn it black and white in any photo editing program. It is important also to put a paper handkerchief or a piece of paper under you drawing hand so as to not smudge your already existing shading and create a mess.\r\n\r\nStep 16 - Continue shading on the other side of the face as well. After you are done, try with light strokes to create a gradient passage from shaded parts to those outlined white spots. Doing so will ensure they won’t stand out as much and will seem more realistic.\r\n<h2>Shading the Hair</h2>\r\nStep 17 - Shade the hair, pressing harder on the pencil but not too hard.\r\n\r\nStep 18 - Imitate shades on the reference photograph.\r\n\r\nDo not use straight harsh strokes. Instead use curved strokes that imitate the curvature of hair. You may wish to use another type of pencil, as mentioned in Step 13.\r\n\r\nStep 19 - Finish shading Selena’s hair. Leave some of the lesser dark parts untouched in some places to imitate shiny, healthy hair. Draw loose strands of hair along the outer edges and along the hairline.\r\n<h2>Completing the Portrait</h2>\r\nStep 20 - Shade the rest of the body with light strokes, using the same pencil that was used for the facial skin tones.\r\n\r\nStep 21 - Shade the collarbone and other darker parts, always trying to change stroke direction and inclination according to the reference photo. Add details like moles and use an eraser to pull out highlights as needed.\r\n\r\nLook over your drawing for any necessary fine-tuning or finishing touches. Carefully brush away any residue left behind on your drawing from your eraser.\r\n\r\nAt this point, your drawing should be complete! Hopefully you found this tutorial on how to draw Selena Gomez useful. I trust that you will apply some of the tips from this lesson to some of your future drawings.','How to Draw Selena Gomez','','inherit','closed','closed','','3788-revision-v1','','','2017-10-01 15:34:54','2017-10-01 22:34:54','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3788-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3790,2,'2017-10-14 02:09:49','2017-10-14 09:09:49','At some point early in every artist’s development we find ourselves asking someone how to draw people. People are commonplace, ever present, a subject of constant fascination. We see them beautifully depicted by the Masters, simplified as superheroes, and used as a canvas of infinite imagination by concept artists and designers.\r\n\r\nBut drawing people is hard. This is because people are themselves made up of multiple smaller, yet no less intricate, pieces. It can be incredibly difficult, but with a little patience and perseverance, we will work and learn together and grow as artists. Before you know it, you’ll be drawing people as though it were second nature.\r\n\r\nIn this tutorial, I’m going to show you one helpful process you can use to draw an ear. At first glance ears appear to be a complex series of twisting and intertwining shapes. It can be intimidating. Many artists, myself included, have a tendency to oversimplify the ear or cover it up with elaborate hair-styles.\r\n\r\nBut the ear itself is nowhere near as complex as it seems. Covering the ear up or oversimplifying also means that the artist is missing out on an opportunity to instill the subject with greater personality. That’s why in this tutorial we’re going to take things one step further. We’re drawing an ear with piercings.\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3846\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"480\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg\"><img class=\"wp-image-3846 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings-480x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"480\" height=\"600\" /></a> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/forca_info\">Forca</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nPlease work alongside me throughout this tutorial. Take your time and work at your own pace, but try and do each step as you read through it. Don’t be afraid to stop and take your time with any section. Work through each step as best as you can and then move on to the next. I will guide you with tips, advice, and a detailed explanation of the process.\r\n\r\nThe first thing that we need to get started is our tools.\r\n<h2>Setup</h2>\r\nThough I will next outline a small selection of specific tools for this project, all you really need to follow along is a comfortable, well-lit place to work, a sketchbook or other drawing paper, a pencil, and an eraser. If you have access to additional tools that may help you, please feel free to use them.\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>...8x10” sketchbook (medium weight, lightly textured)</li>\r\n 	<li>...5mm Graphite Stick for block-in and sketching</li>\r\n 	<li>...HB Pencil for the mid-tones</li>\r\n 	<li>...2B Pencil for dark values and shadows</li>\r\n 	<li>...0.5mm mechanical pencil for details</li>\r\n 	<li>...kneaded eraser for all things erasable</li>\r\n</ul>\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/step-materials-how-to-draw-an-ear.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3847\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/step-materials-how-to-draw-an-ear-420x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"420\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nIf you do not have access to all of these tools, have no fear. All you really need is a pencil and paper and you can follow along. So gather your tools, find a comfortable spot, and let’s get started!\r\n<h2>The Block-In</h2>\r\nThe block-in is probably the most important stage in any drawing. It doesn’t matter if it’s just a quick sketch or a Master Work, the block-in will ultimately determine the final result of the drawing. Unfortunately, it’s also one of the more challenging and least exciting aspects of any drawing. In fact, I wouldn’t blame you for wanting to skip it altogether.\r\n\r\nDon’t.\r\n\r\nTake the time required to do the block-in and do it well. This is an essential step and any mistakes made here will carry on throughout the rest of the drawing. A good measure to use at this stage is this: do you like what you see? If you do, great. If not, try and figure out what it is that you don’t like. Don’t expect it to suddenly become better in a later stage of the drawing because everything else you do is only going to be built upon what you have done in this stage.\r\n<h3>The Largest Shape</h3>\r\nA good practice to get into when drawing almost anything is to start with the largest shapes. Again, I know it’s tempting to just choose a point and start sketching, but in art it’s often best to work from large to small.\r\n\r\nLooking at the reference image, think about what the largest shape is. The shape that encompasses everything you want to draw. I’m not just talking about the shape of the ear, I’m talking about the simplest shape that both the ear and the earrings create. Once you think you’ve got a good idea as to what that largest shape is, start sketching.\r\n\r\nBegin by using a 5mm graphite stick to lightly sketch out the largest form. If you do not have something similar just use your softest pencil -- HB, H, 2H, etc. are all good choices -- or simply work as lightly as you can with what you have available. Hold the tool between your thumb and forefinger and, drawing from your elbow, sketch out the largest shape using a series of straight lines.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3835\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings-420x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"420\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nTIP: Using straight lines will make it easier to simplify this large shape. Draw from point to point, almost like connect the dots, along the outermost edges of the shape. We can always come back later and make it nice and curvy.\r\n\r\nThis shape encompasses everything that will be contained within the drawing. This means the earrings as well as the ear itself. The shape represents the outermost boundaries of the image and from here on out everything you draw should be contained within.\r\n\r\nIf, in future steps, you find yourself drawing outside this initial shape, take a moment to reevaluate your proportions. Everything should fit within this shape. Take your time. Compare angles and proportions regularly.\r\n<h3>Draw an Ear</h3>\r\nNow that we’ve established our largest shape we can begin <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/listen-up-to-learn-how-to-draw-ears/\">sketching the ear</a> itself. Still using a soft graphite or light touch and still drawing from the elbow. Take your time here. Try to make broad sweeping lines, not little repeating hash marks. Even if it isn’t completely accurate a single line will always appear more confident than a series of hesitant strokes.\r\n\r\nAt this point we can feel free to erase anything that we feel isn’t working in order to retry it and get it just right. Throughout this stage you can continue to make adjustments both to the ear itself and to the largest shape we’ve already drawn. Use the process of sketching the ear within the largest shape to make adjustments to your proportions.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3836\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings-420x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"420\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nTIP: At this stage erasing is free. Don’t rush. Even step away from the drawing for a few minutes and come back with fresh eyes. Erase what needs to be fixed and make those changes while you still can.\r\n\r\nRegularly compare your image to the reference. Find various specific points on the ear and compare them relative to each other. How far away are they? What internal shapes or patterns do they make? Do they line up with any other important features of the ear? These questions will help you refine your proportions and get a more accurate sketch.\r\n<h3>Blocking-in the Piercings</h3>\r\nNow that we have our ear nicely sketched out, we can start blocking-in the earrings themselves. Begin by drawing a simple ellipse to figure out the placement and proportions of each piercing. This will also help you to establish the perspective of the shape.\r\n\r\nOnce you’re satisfied we can begin sketching out the larger shapes of the earrings themselves. Keep it as simple as possible at this stage. Lines and cylinders only.\r\n\r\nDon’t worry about the fact that not all the earrings are perfect ellipses. At this point simplifying the form is far more important and it will help you find placement and proportions more accurately.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3837\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings-420x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"420\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nNotice that in the final block-in for the piercings, they are simplified to such a degree that some individual shapes are combined into one larger shape. At this stage the details don’t matter. Get the larger shapes right and the details will follow.\r\n\r\nTIP: When working with any complex form ignore the detail to start with. Try to find the biggest shapes and the simple geometric forms (cylinder, sphere, cube) that make up more complex objects.\r\n<h2>Basic Shadows</h2>\r\nNow that our sketch is complete and we’re happy with it we can begin to lay in some of the basic shadows.\r\n\r\nTIP: This is the point of no return. If you’re not happy with the sketch keep refining it until you are. From here on out it’s going to become more and more difficult to fix any early mistakes.\r\n\r\nThough we’ve blocked-in our earrings at this stage we’re not going to worry too much about them for now, especially when it comes to laying in the shadow shapes. We’ll deal with the shadows on the earrings in more detail in a future step. First, we have one of the most important elements when it comes to defining the form of your subject.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3838\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings-420x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"420\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h3>Core Shadows</h3>\r\nThe core shadows will be some of the darkest shadows in the drawing. They occur at the point where the form begins to turn away from the light.\r\n\r\nAt this stage, we’re still using our 5mm graphite stick, though we’re allowing the values to build up a great deal more. This is only partially done by applying greater pressure. Be careful about pressing too hard. You may build up a much darker value far faster than you want. Instead go over the shadow area multiple times, layering in darker values bit by bit.\r\n\r\nFor now, think about the form. Think about the direction of the light. Where the form begins to turn away from the light is where we will put our core shadows.\r\n\r\nTo draw my core shadows, I usually make sure that I have a flat side on whatever tool I’m using. To get a flat side, you can find a rough surface, concrete, wood, or sandpaper, and shave the graphite down on one side. A small pocket knife could also do the trick. Just use proper knife safety and always work with the blade moving away from you.\r\n\r\nOnce you have a flat edge to your graphite, take hold of the pencil gently between your thumb and forefinger and, using your whole arm, fill in the core shadows. If you’re not used to drawing this way or with the flat edge you may wish to do some practice on a separate sheet of paper. Practice creating soft lines that go from thick to thin. Do this with both ‘S’ and ‘C’ curves. Once you have a good feel for it return to the drawing and try it for real.\r\n\r\nThe core shadow itself can range from soft and wide where the form turns gently, to thin and sharp where the form turns more quickly away from the light. Keep in mind that the core shadow should never be completely sharp or hard edged. It can come close, but there should always be a little softness to it.\r\n<h3>Shadow Shapes</h3>\r\nHaving established our core shadows, we can begin <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/take-the-stress-out-of-shading-with-these-pencil-shading-techniques/\">filling in our shadow shapes</a>. There are a couple of different ways to approach this. One method is to begin by softly outlining the larger shapes of the shadows themselves wherever you see them. However, if you feel confident enough you can start by filling in the areas directly.\r\n\r\nIf you choose to outline the shadow shapes first, try to avoid making hard lines or sharp edges. The one exception to this rule is in the case of cast shadows.\r\n\r\nCast shadows are like core shadows in that they are among the darkest areas of value in the drawing. Cast shadows also helps to describe an object\'s form as they will bend and curve along whatever surface they are cast upon. Generally speaking, cast shadows will have a much sharper edge.\r\n\r\nTo draw shadows shapes, switch from the 5mm graphite stick to the 2B pencil. Still holding the pencil between your thumb and forefinger, and drawing from your elbow as much as possible, begin carefully establishing the shadow shape using the method of your choice.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3839\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings-420x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"420\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nDo your best to use a uniform value at this stage. For now, ignore any variations in value that you see. It should be dark, but still lighter than the core shadows. This would also be a good time to darken your core shadows if you feel they are still too light. Feel free to lightly fill in the shadow shapes on the earrings if you choose, but we will be tackling the earrings in greater detail in the next step.\r\n\r\nTIP: Having trouble seeing the values and where the major shadow shapes are? Try squinting. Squinting at the image limits the visual information that can enter your eyes and only the highest contrast areas will be visible. The darker areas you see will be your shadow shapes.\r\n<h2>The Piercings</h2>\r\nNow that we have our basic shadows in place we can return to working on the earrings themselves. In this section, we will finish blocking in any details and establish the value range of the metal piercings. At the completion of this section, all important elements of the piercings will be in place.\r\n<h3>Refining the Earrings</h3>\r\nIn the early stages of this tutorial we simply established the largest shapes of the earrings, their placement and proportions. Now it is time to refine those larger shapes. During this time, switch back and forth between your 2B and mechanical pencil as needed.\r\n\r\nBroadly speaking, use your mechanical pencil whenever you need to define the details and basic shadow lay in, and switch to a 2B when you need to emphasize the darker values a bit more.\r\n\r\nAt this stage feel free to draw from your wrist, holding the pencil in whatever manner is most comfortable.\r\n\r\nTIP: If you’re drawing in a sketchbook consider rotating the page to get the best angle on whatever details you’re drawing. Look for positions that allow the natural arc of your wrist’s range of movement to do the work for you. If you find yourself drawing in such a way that feels cramped or unnatural it’s a good bet that there’s a better angle you could be working from.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3840\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings-420x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"420\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nJust like with the ear, begin by finding the core shadows and darkening them to a greater degree. Fill in the shadow shapes as best as you can as well. Pay special attention to the nature of the material. Notice how the metal transitions much more quickly from dark to light and has a greater contrast between dark and light than the ear does.\r\n\r\nOnce you established your basic shadow shapes, begin carefully filling in the details. Remember to work from large to small.\r\n\r\nIn the image above, you can clearly see the steps that are used. The earrings at the top of the ear are virtually complete. At the middle of the ear you can see how the largest shapes are broken into smaller shapes, ready for details. Finally, at the bottom and left side of the ear you can see the earrings virtually unchanged from the previous steps.\r\n\r\nAt this stage, we are only concerned with the secondary shapes and how the light affects them. While you may be tempted to draw every detail you see, try to refrain from doing so. Focus on how the larger shapes we’ve already established break down into smaller shapes. Then think about how the light and dark values apply to them.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3841\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings-420x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"420\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nAt this point we’re simply repeating steps already taken. There are quite a few piercings and a lot of detail to consider. Remember to take your time. If you find yourself getting fatigued, step away from the drawing for 15 minutes. Get some water, stretch, or go for a short walk. Then come back and continue.\r\n\r\nTIP: Don’t worry about capturing every detail. Look for ways to simplify the detail or even get rid of it completely, especially in darker areas. Too many details will make things look overcrowded, the eye won’t know what to look at. Be selective and save the most detail for the areas that have the highest contrast.\r\n\r\nCompare the two images in this section. Note the progression between the two. With each earring, we’re going through the same steps. Major Shapes, Secondary Shapes and Values, Details and Detailed Values. Make sure that you complete each step before moving on. If you try to add details before you’ve established your secondary shapes and major values, you’ll only find yourself erasing a great deal of work later on.\r\n<h2>Refining the Values</h2>\r\nAt this point in the drawing almost every important element and relationship is in place. From here on out the changes that we make will be relatively minor. No more major changes, no more additions. You wanted to draw an ear? Well at this point you’ve essentially done so. From here on out it’s all about refinement and process of taking the drawing to completion.\r\n\r\nAt this point frustration can set in. Especially if we didn’t spend as much time getting our proportions and relationships right in the beginning. This is where those things will really start to matter.\r\n\r\nI know all too well the feeling of looking at a drawing that has reached this stage and feeling like a failure. There’s a little voice inside your head that says “Don’t bother finishing this. You can do better if you just start over.”  While there are some circumstances where a drawing is beyond redemption, we are much more likely to think it’s true than for it to actually be true.\r\n\r\nFor now, ignore that voice. Especially if you’re just beginning to learn how to draw. Ignore it. Shut it out completely. Finishing a drawing is a skill in its own right and is every bit as important as anything we’ve done so far. So finish it, evaluate it honestly, and then draw some more.\r\n<h3>Occlusion Shadows</h3>\r\nOcclusion shadows are easily overlooked or easily simplified. But they are among the most important shadows in any drawing, right up there with the core shadows when it comes to describing form.\r\n\r\nOcclusion shadows occur where the form overlaps itself or where two planes come together creating a crease or crevice. If you want to see an example of occlusion shadows in real life, then simply hold your hand flat and straight under a harsh light.\r\n\r\nYou can still see all the little creases of your knuckles, right? Even though it’s under direct light. This is because as your skin folds together there are places where it’s so close together that even direct light can’t fully penetrate it and we see a shadow.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3842\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings-420x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"420\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nOcclusion shadows can be a bit tricky. Not that the technique is difficult, but simply because of the mindset required. It can be tempting to just outline everything but you must resist that temptation.\r\n\r\nOcclusion shadows occur where two planes in the form either overlap or come very close together creating a crease or crevice. Look for such locations.\r\n\r\nAt this point we’re still using a 2B pencil. Drawing from your elbow and shoulder carefully, use your pencil to darken any areas where forms overlap. Do this for both ear and the piercings wherever two forms overlap or come in close contact.\r\n\r\nTIP: Use your best judgment when it comes to adding occlusion shadows. If you feel like the image would look better if there were a nice thick black line in a place where there wouldn’t naturally be one, give it a try. Exaggeration and stylization are all tools in the artist toolbox. The degree to which you use them is determined by what your ultimate goals for the drawing are.\r\n<h3>Dark Values</h3>\r\nWe continue to refine our drawing by reinforcing our dark values. This is where we get to go crazy adding all kinds of variations to the dark values. Take time to layer in all the really dark darks, work to add texture to the ear by showing the different values and shades that play across it.\r\n\r\nStill using a 2B pencil, begin to add variation to the darker values. Once again, I would say that you should feel free to draw however is most comfortable. Try to avoid shading with the point of the pencil directly, but other than that use whatever technique you find works the best for you.\r\n\r\nStart by looking for the darkest areas and filling them in. If needed, reinforce some of the core shadows at this stage as well. Proceed slowing and don’t press to hard. It’s all about looking for the variations in values and gradually layering in those darks.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3843\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings-420x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"420\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nTIP: Be careful not to fill in areas of reflected light. The reflected light being the softer shadow on the inside of the core shadows. Most noticeable in this image at the top curve and inner curves of the ear. The combination of cast shadow and reflected light are some of the strongest contributors to the illusion of form.\r\n<h3>Mid-Tones</h3>\r\nNow using your lightest pencil (such as an HB) or lightest touch, begin filling in the half tones. Do this as lightly and carefully as possible. However, since almost all the remaining white space is mid-tone, feel free to fill it with a light uniform value in the same way you filled in your shadow shapes. Just remember that your lightest darks should still be darker than your darkest lights.\r\n\r\nOnce you’ve filled in your base mid-tones, you can begin working on some of the darker mid-tones. Give careful consideration to the forms. Ask yourself “Which way is the form turning?” and try to shade by making strokes parallel to the form. This will serve to reinforce its three-dimentionality as all your pencil strokes will be moving in the same direction as the form itself.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3844\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings-420x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"420\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nBeginning artists tend to think of the eraser only as a tool for getting rid of mistakes. This could not be farther from the truth. The eraser is as much a tool of creation as the pencil is, you just have to know how to use it.\r\n\r\nIn this instance, we’re going to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/what-is-a-kneaded-eraser-heres-everything-you-ever-wanted-to-know/\">use our eraser to give our image highlights</a>. Take your eraser and carefully knock back some of the mid-tones wherever you see highlights. Be careful not to erase too much. The highlights should be placed strategically, wherever you feel they will create the most contrast to bring out the form.\r\n\r\nTIP: The highlights should be softer on the ear and harder on the earrings. Remember, different materials reflect light in different ways.\r\n<h2>The Final Refinement</h2>\r\nAt this stage, we could call the image done. However, usually at this point we as artists have been staring at the same piece of paper for so long that we almost don’t even see it anymore. Do yourself a favor at this stage and walk away for a few hours. This will allow you to come back and look at it again with fresh eyes, and fresh eyes will allow you to see things that you would not otherwise see.\r\n\r\nNow is the time to double check everything. Make sure your darks are as dark as you want them, your highlights and midtones as light as you want them. Reinforce and shapes or shading that may have gotten smudged or has faded over time.\r\n\r\nIf some areas seem a bit harsh or hard edged and you want to add some soft edges or smooth transitions, use a blending tool such as a blending stump, tortillion, or tissue to carefully smudge those areas of the drawing. Do this with caution. Not everything needs to be smooth, and a nice balance of smooth and hard transitions will add contrast and create visual interest in the image.\r\n\r\nRefine until you’re happy. Check the reference constantly. Just be aware that at some point you’ll have to take that last most difficult step and, for better or worse, call it done.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3845\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings-420x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"420\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Conclusion</h2>\r\nWe’ve come a long way together and I hope you’ve learned as much from this experience as I have, but our journey is not over. As artists, we must continue to push ourselves forward at every opportunity and draw constantly.\r\n\r\nTo truly learn to draw an ear you cannot simply do this tutorial once. Do it twice, three times, four times. Take what you’ve learned and try to apply it without the tutorial. Draw from other reference photographs, draw ears from your imagination. Once you’ve done all that and more, come back and do this tutorial a fifth or sixth time. See for yourself the difference.\r\n\r\nAlways save your work, all of it. Not matter how bad you think it is. If it’s something you put real time and effort into, an end in and of itself, hang on to it. There is no better feeling as an artist than looking back over your past work and seeing how much you’ve grown. And there’s no worse feeling than looking back at something you abandoned in frustration and realizing that it wasn’t nearly as bad as you thought.\r\n\r\nDrawing is a skill that you must constantly develop. Never stop learning, but never stop drawing what you care about either. Or put simply, never stop drawing.\r\n\r\n<em><strong><span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Note</span>:</strong> I would like to thank artist <strong>Noble McCredy</strong> for contributing his drawings and tips for this tutorial!</em>','How to Draw an Ear with Piercings','','publish','open','open','','how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','','2017-10-08 18:26:30','2017-10-09 01:26:30','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/?p=3790',0,'post','',0),(3791,2,'2017-10-01 15:48:53','2017-10-01 22:48:53','At some point early in every artist’s development we find ourselves asking someone how to draw people. People are commonplace, ever present, a subject of constant fascination. We see them beautifully depicted by the Masters, simplified as superheroes, and used as a canvas of infinite imagination by concept artists and designers.\r\n\r\nBut drawing people is hard. This is because people are themselves made up of multiple smaller, yet no less intricate, pieces. It can be incredibly difficult, but with a little patience and perseverance, we will work and learn together and grow as artists. Before you know it, you’ll be drawing people as though it were second nature.\r\n\r\nIn this tutorial, I’m going to show you one helpful process you can use to draw an ear. At first glance ears appear to be a complex series of twisting and intertwining shapes. It can be intimidating. Many artists, myself included, have a tendency to oversimplify the ear or cover it up with elaborate hair-styles.\r\n\r\nBut the ear itself is nowhere near as complex as it seems. Covering the ear up or oversimplifying also means that the artist is missing out on an opportunity to instill the subject with greater personality. That’s why in this tutorial we’re going to take things one step further. We’re drawing an ear with piercings.\r\n\r\nPlease work alongside me throughout this tutorial. Take your time and work at your own pace, but try and do each step as you read through it. Don’t be afraid to stop and take your time with any section. Work through each step as best as you can and then move on to the next. I will guide you with tips, advice, and a detailed explanation of the process.\r\n\r\nThe first thing that we need to get started is our tools.\r\n<h3>Setup</h3>\r\nThough I will next outline a small selection of specific tools for this project, all you really need to follow along is a comfortable, well-lit place to work, a sketchbook or other drawing paper, a pencil, and an eraser. If you have access to additional tools that may help you, please feel free to use them.\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>...8x10” sketchbook (medium weight, lightly textured)</li>\r\n 	<li>...5mm Graphite Stick for block-in and sketching</li>\r\n 	<li>...HB Pencil for the mid-tones</li>\r\n 	<li>...2B Pencil for dark values and shadows</li>\r\n 	<li>...0.05mm Mechanical Pencil for details</li>\r\n 	<li>...Kneaded Eraser for all things erasable</li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[Image Zero Here]\r\n\r\nIf you do not have access to all of these tools, have no fear. All you really need is a pencil and paper and you can follow along. So gather your tools, find a comfortable spot, and let’s get started!\r\n<h3>The Block-In</h3>\r\nThe block-in is probably the most important stage in any drawing. It doesn’t matter if it’s just a quick sketch or a Master Work, the block-in will ultimately determine the final result of the drawing. Unfortunately, it’s also one of the more challenging and least exciting aspects of any drawing. In fact, I wouldn’t blame you for wanting to skip it altogether.\r\n\r\nDon’t.\r\n\r\nTake the time required to do the block-in and do it well. This is an essential step and any mistakes made here will carry on throughout the rest of the drawing. A good measure to use at this stage is this: do you like what you see? If you do, great. If not, try and figure out what it is that you don’t like. Don’t expect it to suddenly become better in a later stage of the drawing because everything else you do is only going to be built upon what you have done in this stage.\r\n<h4>The Largest Shape</h4>\r\nA good practice to get into when drawing almost anything is to start with the largest shapes. Again, I know it’s tempting to just choose a point and start sketching, but in art it’s often best to work from large to small.\r\n\r\nLooking at the reference image, think about what the largest shape is. The shape that encompasses everything you want to draw. I’m not just talking about the shape of the ear, I’m talking about the simplest shape that both the ear and the earrings create. Once you think you’ve got a good idea as to what that largest shape is, start sketching.\r\n\r\nBegin by using a 5mm graphite stick to lightly sketch out the largest form. If you do not have something similar just use your softest pencil -- HB, H, 2H, etc. are all good choices -- or simply work as lightly as you can with what you have available. Hold the tool between your thumb and forefinger and, drawing from your elbow, sketch out the largest shape using a series of straight lines.\r\n\r\n[Image One Here]\r\n\r\nTIP: Using straight lines will make it easier to simplify this large shape. Draw from point to point, almost like connect the dots, along the outermost edges of the shape. We can always come back later and make it nice and curvy.\r\n\r\nThis shape encompasses everything that will be contained within the drawing. This means the earrings as well as the ear itself. The shape represents the outermost boundaries of the image and from here on out everything you draw should be contained within.\r\n\r\nIf, in future steps, you find yourself drawing outside this initial shape, take a moment to reevaluate your proportions. Everything should fit within this shape. Take your time. Compare angles and proportions regularly.\r\n<h4>Draw an Ear</h4>\r\nNow that we’ve established our largest shape we can begin sketching the ear itself. Still using a soft graphite or light touch and still drawing from the elbow. Take your time here. Try to make broad sweeping lines, not little repeating hash marks. Even if it isn’t completely accurate a single line will always appear more confident than a series of hesitant strokes.\r\n\r\nAt this point we can feel free to erase anything that we feel isn’t working in order to retry it and get it just right. Throughout this stage you can continue to make adjustments both to the ear itself and to the largest shape we’ve already drawn. Use the process of sketching the ear within the largest shape to make adjustments to your proportions.\r\n\r\n[Image Two Here]\r\n\r\nTIP: At this stage erasing is free. Don’t rush. Even step away from the drawing for a few minutes and come back with fresh eyes. Erase what needs to be fixed and make those changes while you still can.\r\n\r\nRegularly compare your image to the reference. Find various specific points on the ear and compare them relative to each other. How far away are they? What internal shapes or patterns do they make? Do they line up with any other important features of the ear? These questions will help you refine your proportions and get a more accurate sketch.\r\n<h4>Blocking-in the Piercings</h4>\r\nNow that we have our ear nicely sketched out, we can start blocking-in the earrings themselves. Begin by drawing a simple ellipse to figure out the placement and proportions of each piercing. This will also help you to establish the perspective of the shape.\r\n\r\nOnce you’re satisfied we can begin sketching out the larger shapes of the earrings themselves. Keep it as simple as possible at this stage. Lines and cylinders only.\r\n\r\nDon’t worry about the fact that not all the earrings are perfect ellipses. At this point simplifying the form is far more important and it will help you find placement and proportions more accurately.\r\n\r\n[Image Three Here]\r\n\r\nNotice that in the final block-in for the piercings, they are simplified to such a degree that some individual shapes are combined into one larger shape. At this stage the details don’t matter. Get the larger shapes right and the details will follow.\r\n\r\nTIP: When working with any complex form ignore the detail to start with. Try to find the biggest shapes and the simple geometric forms (cylinder, sphere, cube) that make up more complex objects.\r\n<h3>Basic Shadows</h3>\r\nNow that our sketch is complete and we’re happy with it we can begin to lay in some of the basic shadows.\r\n\r\nTIP: This is the point of no return. If you’re not happy with the sketch keep refining it until you are. From here on out it’s going to become more and more difficult to fix any early mistakes.\r\n\r\nThough we’ve blocked-in our earrings at this stage we’re not going to worry too much about them for now, especially when it comes to laying in the shadow shapes. We’ll deal with the shadows on the earrings in more detail in a future step. First, we have one of the most important elements when it comes to defining the form of your subject.\r\n\r\n[Image Four Here]\r\n<h4>Core Shadows</h4>\r\nThe core shadows will be some of the darkest shadows in the drawing. They occur at the point where the form begins to turn away from the light.\r\n\r\nAt this stage, we’re still using our 5mm graphite stick, though we’re allowing the values to build up a great deal more. This is only partially done by applying greater pressure. Be careful about pressing too hard. You may build up a much darker value far faster than you want. Instead go over the shadow area multiple times, layering in darker values bit by bit.\r\n\r\nFor now, think about the form. Think about the direction of the light. Where the form begins to turn away from the light is where we will put our core shadows.\r\n\r\nTo draw my core shadows, I usually make sure that I have a flat side on whatever tool I’m using. To get a flat side, you can find a rough surface, concrete, wood, or sandpaper, and shave the graphite down on one side. A small pocket knife could also do the trick. Just use proper knife safety and always work with the blade moving away from you.\r\n\r\nOnce you have a flat edge to your graphite, take hold of the pencil gently between your thumb and forefinger and, using your whole arm, fill in the core shadows. If you’re not used to drawing this way or with the flat edge you may wish to do some practice on a separate sheet of paper. Practice creating soft lines that go from thick to thin. Do this with both ‘S’ and ‘C’ curves. Once you have a good feel for it return to the drawing and try it for real.\r\n\r\nThe core shadow itself can range from soft and wide where the form turns gently, to thin and sharp where the form turns more quickly away from the light. Keep in mind that the core shadow should never be completely sharp or hard edged. It can come close, but there should always be a little softness to it.\r\n<h4>Shadow Shapes</h4>\r\nHaving established our core shadows, we can begin filling in our shadow shapes. There are a couple of different ways to approach this. One method is to begin by softly outlining the larger shapes of the shadows themselves wherever you see them. However, if you feel confident enough you can start by filling in the areas directly.\r\n\r\nIf you choose to outline the shadow shapes first, try to avoid making hard lines or sharp edges. The one exception to this rule is in the case of cast shadows.\r\n\r\nCast shadows are like core shadows in that they are among the darkest areas of value in the drawing. Cast shadows also helps to describe an object\'s form as they will bend and curve along whatever surface they are cast upon. Generally speaking, cast shadows will have a much sharper edge.\r\n\r\nTo draw shadows shapes, switch from the 5mm graphite stick to the 2B pencil. Still holding the pencil between your thumb and forefinger, and drawing from your elbow as much as possible, begin carefully establishing the shadow shape using the method of your choice.\r\n\r\n[Image Five Here]\r\n\r\nDo your best to use a uniform value at this stage. For now, ignore any variations in value that you see. It should be dark, but still lighter than the core shadows. This would also be a good time to darken your core shadows if you feel they are still too light. Feel free to lightly fill in the shadow shapes on the earrings if you choose, but we will be tackling the earrings in greater detail in the next step.\r\n\r\nTIP: Having trouble seeing the values and where the major shadow shapes are? Try squinting. Squinting at the image limits the visual information that can enter your eyes and only the highest contrast areas will be visible. The darker areas you see will be your shadow shapes.\r\n<h3>The Piercings</h3>\r\nNow that we have our basic shadows in place we can return to working on the earrings themselves. In this section, we will finish blocking in any details and establish the value range of the metal piercings. At the completion of this section, all important elements of the piercings will be in place.\r\n<h4>Refining the Earrings</h4>\r\nIn the early stages of this tutorial we simply established the largest shapes of the earrings, their placement and proportions. Now it is time to refine those larger shapes. During this time, switch back and forth between your 2B and Mechanical Pencil as needed.\r\n\r\nBroadly speaking, use your mechanical pencil whenever you need to define the details and basic shadow lay in, and switch to a 2B when you need to emphasize the darker values a bit more.\r\n\r\nAt this stage feel free to draw from your wrist, holding the pencil in whatever manner is most comfortable.\r\n\r\nTIP: If you’re drawing in a sketchbook consider rotating the page to get the best angle on whatever details you’re drawing. Look for positions that allow the natural arc of your wrist’s range of movement to do the work for you. If you find yourself drawing in such a way that feels cramped or unnatural it’s a good bet that there’s a better angle you could be working from.\r\n\r\n[Image Six Here]\r\n\r\nJust like with the ear, begin by finding the core shadows and darkening them to a greater degree. Fill in the shadow shapes as best as you can as well. Pay special attention to the nature of the material. Notice how the metal transitions much more quickly from dark to light and has a greater contrast between dark and light than the ear does.\r\n\r\nOnce you established your basic shadow shapes, begin carefully filling in the details. Remember to work from large to small.\r\n\r\nIn the image above, you can clearly see the steps that are used. The earrings at the top of the ear are virtually complete. At the middle of the ear you can see how the largest shapes are broken into smaller shapes, ready for details. Finally, at the bottom and left side of the ear you can see the earrings virtually unchanged from the previous steps.\r\n\r\nAt this stage, we are only concerned with the secondary shapes and how the light affects them. While you may be tempted to draw every detail you see, try to refrain from doing so. Focus on how the larger shapes we’ve already established break down into smaller shapes. Then think about how the light and dark values apply to them.\r\n\r\n[Image Seven Here]\r\n\r\nAt this point we’re simply repeating steps already taken. There are quite a few piercings and a lot of detail to consider. Remember to take your time. If you find yourself getting fatigued, step away from the drawing for 15 minutes. Get some water, stretch, or go for a short walk. Then come back and continue.\r\n\r\nTIP: Don’t worry about capturing every detail. Look for ways to simplify the detail or even get rid of it completely, especially in darker areas. Too many details will make things look overcrowded, the eye won’t know what to look at. Be selective and save the most detail for the areas that have the highest contrast.\r\n\r\nCompare the two images in this section. Note the progression between the two. With each earring, we’re going through the same steps. Major Shapes, Secondary Shapes and Values, Details and Detailed Values. Make sure that you complete each step before moving on. If you try to add details before you’ve established your secondary shapes and major values, you’ll only find yourself erasing a great deal of work later on.\r\n<h3>Refining the Values</h3>\r\nAt this point in the drawing almost every important element and relationship is in place. From here on out the changes that we make will be relatively minor. No more major changes, no more additions. You wanted to draw an ear? Well at this point you’ve essentially done so. From here on out it’s all about refinement and process of taking the drawing to completion.\r\n\r\nAt this point frustration can set in. Especially if we didn’t spend as much time getting our proportions and relationships right in the beginning. This is where those things will really start to matter.\r\n\r\nI know all too well the feeling of looking at a drawing that has reached this stage and feeling like a failure. There’s a little voice inside your head that says “Don’t bother finishing this. You can do better if you just start over.”  While there are some circumstances where a drawing is beyond redemption, we are much more likely to think it’s true than for it to actually be true.\r\n\r\nFor now, ignore that voice. Especially if you’re just beginning to learn how to draw. Ignore it. Shut it out completely. Finishing a drawing is a skill in its own right and is every bit as important as anything we’ve done so far. So finish it, evaluate it honestly, and then draw some more.\r\n<h4>Occlusion Shadows</h4>\r\nOcclusion shadows are easily overlooked or easily simplified. But they are among the most important shadows in any drawing, right up there with the core shadows when it comes to describing form.\r\n\r\nOcclusion shadows occur where the form overlaps itself or where two planes come together creating a crease or crevice. If you want to see an example of occlusion shadows in real life, then simply hold your hand flat and straight under a harsh light.\r\n\r\nYou can still see all the little creases of your knuckles, right? Even though it’s under direct light. This is because as your skin folds together there are places where it’s so close together that even direct light can’t fully penetrate it and we see a shadow.\r\n\r\n[Image Eight Here]\r\n\r\nOcclusion shadows can be a bit tricky. Not that the technique is difficult, but simply because of the mindset required. It can be tempting to just outline everything but you must resist that temptation.\r\n\r\nOcclusion shadows occur where two planes in the form either overlap or come very close together creating a crease or crevice. Look for such locations.\r\n\r\nAt this point we’re still using a 2B pencil. Drawing from your elbow and shoulder carefully, use your pencil to darken any areas where forms overlap. Do this for both ear and the piercings wherever two forms overlap or come in close contact.\r\n\r\nTIP: Use your best judgment when it comes to adding occlusion shadows. If you feel like the image would look better if there were a nice thick black line in a place where there wouldn’t naturally be one, give it a try. Exaggeration and stylization are all tools in the artist toolbox. The degree to which you use them is determined by what your ultimate goals for the drawing are.\r\n<h4>Dark Values</h4>\r\nWe continue to refine our drawing by reinforcing our dark values. This is where we get to go crazy adding all kinds of variations to the dark values. Take time to layer in all the really dark darks, work to add texture to the ear by showing the different values and shades that play across it.\r\n\r\nStill using a 2B pencil, begin to add variation to the darker values. Once again, I would say that you should feel free to draw however is most comfortable. Try to avoid shading with the point of the pencil directly, but other than that use whatever technique you find works the best for you.\r\n\r\nStart by looking for the darkest areas and filling them in. If needed, reinforce some of the core shadows at this stage as well. Proceed slowing and don’t press to hard. It’s all about looking for the variations in values and gradually layering in those darks.\r\n\r\n[Image Nine Here]\r\n\r\nTIP: Be careful not to fill in areas of reflected light. The reflected light being the softer shadow on the inside of the core shadows. Most noticeable in this image at the top curve and inner curves of the ear. The combination of cast shadow and reflected light are some of the strongest contributors to the illusion of form.\r\n<h4>Mid-Tones</h4>\r\nNow using your lightest pencil (such as an HB) or lightest touch, begin filling in the half tones. Do this as lightly and carefully as possible. However, since almost all the remaining white space is mid-tone, feel free to fill it with a light uniform value in the same way you filled in your shadow shapes. Just remember that your lightest darks should still be darker than your darkest lights.\r\n\r\nOnce you’ve filled in your base mid-tones, you can begin working on some of the darker mid-tones. Give careful consideration to the forms. Ask yourself “Which way is the form turning?” and try to shade by making strokes parallel to the form. This will serve to reinforce its three-dimentionality as all your pencil strokes will be moving in the same direction as the form itself.\r\n\r\n[Image Ten Here]\r\n\r\nBeginning artists tend to think of the eraser only as a tool for getting rid of mistakes. This could not be farther from the truth. The eraser is as much a tool of creation as the pencil is, you just have to know how to use it.\r\n\r\nIn this instance, we’re going to use our eraser to give our image highlights. Take your eraser and carefully knock back some of the mid-tones wherever you see highlights. Be careful not to erase too much. The highlights should be placed strategically, wherever you feel they will create the most contrast to bring out the form.\r\n\r\nTIP: The highlights should be softer on the ear and harder on the earrings. Remember, different materials reflect light in different ways.\r\n<h3>The Final Refinement</h3>\r\nAt this stage, we could call the image done. However, usually at this point we as artists have been staring at the same piece of paper for so long that we almost don’t even see it anymore. Do yourself a favor at this stage and walk away for a few hours. This will allow you to come back and look at it again with fresh eyes, and fresh eyes will allow you to see things that you would not otherwise see.\r\n\r\nNow is the time to double check everything. Make sure your darks are as dark as you want them, your highlights and midtones as light as you want them. Reinforce and shapes or shading that may have gotten smudged or has faded over time.\r\n\r\nIf some areas seem a bit harsh or hard edged and you want to add some soft edges or smooth transitions, use a blending tool such as a blending stump, tortillion, or tissue to carefully smudge those areas of the drawing. Do this with caution. Not everything needs to be smooth, and a nice balance of smooth and hard transitions will add contrast and create visual interest in the image.\r\n\r\nRefine until you’re happy. Check the reference constantly. Just be aware that at some point you’ll have to take that last most difficult step and, for better or worse, call it done.\r\n\r\n[Final Image Here]\r\n<h3>Conclusion</h3>\r\nWe’ve come a long way together and I hope you’ve learned as much from this experience as I have, but our journey is not over. As artists, we must continue to push ourselves forward at every opportunity and draw constantly.\r\n\r\nTo truly learn to draw an ear you cannot simply do this tutorial once. Do it twice, three times, four times. Take what you’ve learned and try to apply it without the tutorial. Draw from other reference photographs, draw ears from your imagination. Once you’ve done all that and more, come back and do this tutorial a fifth or sixth time. See for yourself the difference.\r\n\r\nAlways save your work, all of it. Not matter how bad you think it is. If it’s something you put real time and effort into, an end in and of itself, hang on to it. There is no better feeling as an artist than looking back over your past work and seeing how much you’ve grown. And there’s no worse feeling than looking back at something you abandoned in frustration and realizing that it wasn’t nearly as bad as you thought.\r\n\r\nDrawing is a skill that you must constantly develop. Never stop learning, but never stop drawing what you care about either. Or put simply, never stop drawing.','How to Draw an Ear with Piercings','','inherit','closed','closed','','3790-revision-v1','','','2017-10-01 15:48:53','2017-10-01 22:48:53','',3790,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3790-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3792,2,'2017-10-01 15:54:44','2017-10-01 22:54:44','At some point early in every artist’s development we find ourselves asking someone how to draw people. People are commonplace, ever present, a subject of constant fascination. We see them beautifully depicted by the Masters, simplified as superheroes, and used as a canvas of infinite imagination by concept artists and designers.\r\n\r\nBut drawing people is hard. This is because people are themselves made up of multiple smaller, yet no less intricate, pieces. It can be incredibly difficult, but with a little patience and perseverance, we will work and learn together and grow as artists. Before you know it, you’ll be drawing people as though it were second nature.\r\n\r\nIn this tutorial, I’m going to show you one helpful process you can use to draw an ear. At first glance ears appear to be a complex series of twisting and intertwining shapes. It can be intimidating. Many artists, myself included, have a tendency to oversimplify the ear or cover it up with elaborate hair-styles.\r\n\r\nBut the ear itself is nowhere near as complex as it seems. Covering the ear up or oversimplifying also means that the artist is missing out on an opportunity to instill the subject with greater personality. That’s why in this tutorial we’re going to take things one step further. We’re drawing an ear with piercings.\r\n\r\nPlease work alongside me throughout this tutorial. Take your time and work at your own pace, but try and do each step as you read through it. Don’t be afraid to stop and take your time with any section. Work through each step as best as you can and then move on to the next. I will guide you with tips, advice, and a detailed explanation of the process.\r\n\r\nThe first thing that we need to get started is our tools.\r\n<h2>Setup</h2>\r\nThough I will next outline a small selection of specific tools for this project, all you really need to follow along is a comfortable, well-lit place to work, a sketchbook or other drawing paper, a pencil, and an eraser. If you have access to additional tools that may help you, please feel free to use them.\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>...8x10” sketchbook (medium weight, lightly textured)</li>\r\n 	<li>...5mm Graphite Stick for block-in and sketching</li>\r\n 	<li>...HB Pencil for the mid-tones</li>\r\n 	<li>...2B Pencil for dark values and shadows</li>\r\n 	<li>...0.05mm Mechanical Pencil for details</li>\r\n 	<li>...Kneaded Eraser for all things erasable</li>\r\n</ul>\r\n[Image Zero Here]\r\n\r\nIf you do not have access to all of these tools, have no fear. All you really need is a pencil and paper and you can follow along. So gather your tools, find a comfortable spot, and let’s get started!\r\n<h2>The Block-In</h2>\r\nThe block-in is probably the most important stage in any drawing. It doesn’t matter if it’s just a quick sketch or a Master Work, the block-in will ultimately determine the final result of the drawing. Unfortunately, it’s also one of the more challenging and least exciting aspects of any drawing. In fact, I wouldn’t blame you for wanting to skip it altogether.\r\n\r\nDon’t.\r\n\r\nTake the time required to do the block-in and do it well. This is an essential step and any mistakes made here will carry on throughout the rest of the drawing. A good measure to use at this stage is this: do you like what you see? If you do, great. If not, try and figure out what it is that you don’t like. Don’t expect it to suddenly become better in a later stage of the drawing because everything else you do is only going to be built upon what you have done in this stage.\r\n<h3>The Largest Shape</h3>\r\nA good practice to get into when drawing almost anything is to start with the largest shapes. Again, I know it’s tempting to just choose a point and start sketching, but in art it’s often best to work from large to small.\r\n\r\nLooking at the reference image, think about what the largest shape is. The shape that encompasses everything you want to draw. I’m not just talking about the shape of the ear, I’m talking about the simplest shape that both the ear and the earrings create. Once you think you’ve got a good idea as to what that largest shape is, start sketching.\r\n\r\nBegin by using a 5mm graphite stick to lightly sketch out the largest form. If you do not have something similar just use your softest pencil -- HB, H, 2H, etc. are all good choices -- or simply work as lightly as you can with what you have available. Hold the tool between your thumb and forefinger and, drawing from your elbow, sketch out the largest shape using a series of straight lines.\r\n\r\n[Image One Here]\r\n\r\nTIP: Using straight lines will make it easier to simplify this large shape. Draw from point to point, almost like connect the dots, along the outermost edges of the shape. We can always come back later and make it nice and curvy.\r\n\r\nThis shape encompasses everything that will be contained within the drawing. This means the earrings as well as the ear itself. The shape represents the outermost boundaries of the image and from here on out everything you draw should be contained within.\r\n\r\nIf, in future steps, you find yourself drawing outside this initial shape, take a moment to reevaluate your proportions. Everything should fit within this shape. Take your time. Compare angles and proportions regularly.\r\n<h3>Draw an Ear</h3>\r\nNow that we’ve established our largest shape we can begin sketching the ear itself. Still using a soft graphite or light touch and still drawing from the elbow. Take your time here. Try to make broad sweeping lines, not little repeating hash marks. Even if it isn’t completely accurate a single line will always appear more confident than a series of hesitant strokes.\r\n\r\nAt this point we can feel free to erase anything that we feel isn’t working in order to retry it and get it just right. Throughout this stage you can continue to make adjustments both to the ear itself and to the largest shape we’ve already drawn. Use the process of sketching the ear within the largest shape to make adjustments to your proportions.\r\n\r\n[Image Two Here]\r\n\r\nTIP: At this stage erasing is free. Don’t rush. Even step away from the drawing for a few minutes and come back with fresh eyes. Erase what needs to be fixed and make those changes while you still can.\r\n\r\nRegularly compare your image to the reference. Find various specific points on the ear and compare them relative to each other. How far away are they? What internal shapes or patterns do they make? Do they line up with any other important features of the ear? These questions will help you refine your proportions and get a more accurate sketch.\r\n<h3>Blocking-in the Piercings</h3>\r\nNow that we have our ear nicely sketched out, we can start blocking-in the earrings themselves. Begin by drawing a simple ellipse to figure out the placement and proportions of each piercing. This will also help you to establish the perspective of the shape.\r\n\r\nOnce you’re satisfied we can begin sketching out the larger shapes of the earrings themselves. Keep it as simple as possible at this stage. Lines and cylinders only.\r\n\r\nDon’t worry about the fact that not all the earrings are perfect ellipses. At this point simplifying the form is far more important and it will help you find placement and proportions more accurately.\r\n\r\n[Image Three Here]\r\n\r\nNotice that in the final block-in for the piercings, they are simplified to such a degree that some individual shapes are combined into one larger shape. At this stage the details don’t matter. Get the larger shapes right and the details will follow.\r\n\r\nTIP: When working with any complex form ignore the detail to start with. Try to find the biggest shapes and the simple geometric forms (cylinder, sphere, cube) that make up more complex objects.\r\n<h2>Basic Shadows</h2>\r\nNow that our sketch is complete and we’re happy with it we can begin to lay in some of the basic shadows.\r\n\r\nTIP: This is the point of no return. If you’re not happy with the sketch keep refining it until you are. From here on out it’s going to become more and more difficult to fix any early mistakes.\r\n\r\nThough we’ve blocked-in our earrings at this stage we’re not going to worry too much about them for now, especially when it comes to laying in the shadow shapes. We’ll deal with the shadows on the earrings in more detail in a future step. First, we have one of the most important elements when it comes to defining the form of your subject.\r\n\r\n[Image Four Here]\r\n<h3>Core Shadows</h3>\r\nThe core shadows will be some of the darkest shadows in the drawing. They occur at the point where the form begins to turn away from the light.\r\n\r\nAt this stage, we’re still using our 5mm graphite stick, though we’re allowing the values to build up a great deal more. This is only partially done by applying greater pressure. Be careful about pressing too hard. You may build up a much darker value far faster than you want. Instead go over the shadow area multiple times, layering in darker values bit by bit.\r\n\r\nFor now, think about the form. Think about the direction of the light. Where the form begins to turn away from the light is where we will put our core shadows.\r\n\r\nTo draw my core shadows, I usually make sure that I have a flat side on whatever tool I’m using. To get a flat side, you can find a rough surface, concrete, wood, or sandpaper, and shave the graphite down on one side. A small pocket knife could also do the trick. Just use proper knife safety and always work with the blade moving away from you.\r\n\r\nOnce you have a flat edge to your graphite, take hold of the pencil gently between your thumb and forefinger and, using your whole arm, fill in the core shadows. If you’re not used to drawing this way or with the flat edge you may wish to do some practice on a separate sheet of paper. Practice creating soft lines that go from thick to thin. Do this with both ‘S’ and ‘C’ curves. Once you have a good feel for it return to the drawing and try it for real.\r\n\r\nThe core shadow itself can range from soft and wide where the form turns gently, to thin and sharp where the form turns more quickly away from the light. Keep in mind that the core shadow should never be completely sharp or hard edged. It can come close, but there should always be a little softness to it.\r\n<h3>Shadow Shapes</h3>\r\nHaving established our core shadows, we can begin filling in our shadow shapes. There are a couple of different ways to approach this. One method is to begin by softly outlining the larger shapes of the shadows themselves wherever you see them. However, if you feel confident enough you can start by filling in the areas directly.\r\n\r\nIf you choose to outline the shadow shapes first, try to avoid making hard lines or sharp edges. The one exception to this rule is in the case of cast shadows.\r\n\r\nCast shadows are like core shadows in that they are among the darkest areas of value in the drawing. Cast shadows also helps to describe an object\'s form as they will bend and curve along whatever surface they are cast upon. Generally speaking, cast shadows will have a much sharper edge.\r\n\r\nTo draw shadows shapes, switch from the 5mm graphite stick to the 2B pencil. Still holding the pencil between your thumb and forefinger, and drawing from your elbow as much as possible, begin carefully establishing the shadow shape using the method of your choice.\r\n\r\n[Image Five Here]\r\n\r\nDo your best to use a uniform value at this stage. For now, ignore any variations in value that you see. It should be dark, but still lighter than the core shadows. This would also be a good time to darken your core shadows if you feel they are still too light. Feel free to lightly fill in the shadow shapes on the earrings if you choose, but we will be tackling the earrings in greater detail in the next step.\r\n\r\nTIP: Having trouble seeing the values and where the major shadow shapes are? Try squinting. Squinting at the image limits the visual information that can enter your eyes and only the highest contrast areas will be visible. The darker areas you see will be your shadow shapes.\r\n<h2>The Piercings</h2>\r\nNow that we have our basic shadows in place we can return to working on the earrings themselves. In this section, we will finish blocking in any details and establish the value range of the metal piercings. At the completion of this section, all important elements of the piercings will be in place.\r\n<h3>Refining the Earrings</h3>\r\nIn the early stages of this tutorial we simply established the largest shapes of the earrings, their placement and proportions. Now it is time to refine those larger shapes. During this time, switch back and forth between your 2B and Mechanical Pencil as needed.\r\n\r\nBroadly speaking, use your mechanical pencil whenever you need to define the details and basic shadow lay in, and switch to a 2B when you need to emphasize the darker values a bit more.\r\n\r\nAt this stage feel free to draw from your wrist, holding the pencil in whatever manner is most comfortable.\r\n\r\nTIP: If you’re drawing in a sketchbook consider rotating the page to get the best angle on whatever details you’re drawing. Look for positions that allow the natural arc of your wrist’s range of movement to do the work for you. If you find yourself drawing in such a way that feels cramped or unnatural it’s a good bet that there’s a better angle you could be working from.\r\n\r\n[Image Six Here]\r\n\r\nJust like with the ear, begin by finding the core shadows and darkening them to a greater degree. Fill in the shadow shapes as best as you can as well. Pay special attention to the nature of the material. Notice how the metal transitions much more quickly from dark to light and has a greater contrast between dark and light than the ear does.\r\n\r\nOnce you established your basic shadow shapes, begin carefully filling in the details. Remember to work from large to small.\r\n\r\nIn the image above, you can clearly see the steps that are used. The earrings at the top of the ear are virtually complete. At the middle of the ear you can see how the largest shapes are broken into smaller shapes, ready for details. Finally, at the bottom and left side of the ear you can see the earrings virtually unchanged from the previous steps.\r\n\r\nAt this stage, we are only concerned with the secondary shapes and how the light affects them. While you may be tempted to draw every detail you see, try to refrain from doing so. Focus on how the larger shapes we’ve already established break down into smaller shapes. Then think about how the light and dark values apply to them.\r\n\r\n[Image Seven Here]\r\n\r\nAt this point we’re simply repeating steps already taken. There are quite a few piercings and a lot of detail to consider. Remember to take your time. If you find yourself getting fatigued, step away from the drawing for 15 minutes. Get some water, stretch, or go for a short walk. Then come back and continue.\r\n\r\nTIP: Don’t worry about capturing every detail. Look for ways to simplify the detail or even get rid of it completely, especially in darker areas. Too many details will make things look overcrowded, the eye won’t know what to look at. Be selective and save the most detail for the areas that have the highest contrast.\r\n\r\nCompare the two images in this section. Note the progression between the two. With each earring, we’re going through the same steps. Major Shapes, Secondary Shapes and Values, Details and Detailed Values. Make sure that you complete each step before moving on. If you try to add details before you’ve established your secondary shapes and major values, you’ll only find yourself erasing a great deal of work later on.\r\n<h2>Refining the Values</h2>\r\nAt this point in the drawing almost every important element and relationship is in place. From here on out the changes that we make will be relatively minor. No more major changes, no more additions. You wanted to draw an ear? Well at this point you’ve essentially done so. From here on out it’s all about refinement and process of taking the drawing to completion.\r\n\r\nAt this point frustration can set in. Especially if we didn’t spend as much time getting our proportions and relationships right in the beginning. This is where those things will really start to matter.\r\n\r\nI know all too well the feeling of looking at a drawing that has reached this stage and feeling like a failure. There’s a little voice inside your head that says “Don’t bother finishing this. You can do better if you just start over.”  While there are some circumstances where a drawing is beyond redemption, we are much more likely to think it’s true than for it to actually be true.\r\n\r\nFor now, ignore that voice. Especially if you’re just beginning to learn how to draw. Ignore it. Shut it out completely. Finishing a drawing is a skill in its own right and is every bit as important as anything we’ve done so far. So finish it, evaluate it honestly, and then draw some more.\r\n<h3>Occlusion Shadows</h3>\r\nOcclusion shadows are easily overlooked or easily simplified. But they are among the most important shadows in any drawing, right up there with the core shadows when it comes to describing form.\r\n\r\nOcclusion shadows occur where the form overlaps itself or where two planes come together creating a crease or crevice. If you want to see an example of occlusion shadows in real life, then simply hold your hand flat and straight under a harsh light.\r\n\r\nYou can still see all the little creases of your knuckles, right? Even though it’s under direct light. This is because as your skin folds together there are places where it’s so close together that even direct light can’t fully penetrate it and we see a shadow.\r\n\r\n[Image Eight Here]\r\n\r\nOcclusion shadows can be a bit tricky. Not that the technique is difficult, but simply because of the mindset required. It can be tempting to just outline everything but you must resist that temptation.\r\n\r\nOcclusion shadows occur where two planes in the form either overlap or come very close together creating a crease or crevice. Look for such locations.\r\n\r\nAt this point we’re still using a 2B pencil. Drawing from your elbow and shoulder carefully, use your pencil to darken any areas where forms overlap. Do this for both ear and the piercings wherever two forms overlap or come in close contact.\r\n\r\nTIP: Use your best judgment when it comes to adding occlusion shadows. If you feel like the image would look better if there were a nice thick black line in a place where there wouldn’t naturally be one, give it a try. Exaggeration and stylization are all tools in the artist toolbox. The degree to which you use them is determined by what your ultimate goals for the drawing are.\r\n<h3>Dark Values</h3>\r\nWe continue to refine our drawing by reinforcing our dark values. This is where we get to go crazy adding all kinds of variations to the dark values. Take time to layer in all the really dark darks, work to add texture to the ear by showing the different values and shades that play across it.\r\n\r\nStill using a 2B pencil, begin to add variation to the darker values. Once again, I would say that you should feel free to draw however is most comfortable. Try to avoid shading with the point of the pencil directly, but other than that use whatever technique you find works the best for you.\r\n\r\nStart by looking for the darkest areas and filling them in. If needed, reinforce some of the core shadows at this stage as well. Proceed slowing and don’t press to hard. It’s all about looking for the variations in values and gradually layering in those darks.\r\n\r\n[Image Nine Here]\r\n\r\nTIP: Be careful not to fill in areas of reflected light. The reflected light being the softer shadow on the inside of the core shadows. Most noticeable in this image at the top curve and inner curves of the ear. The combination of cast shadow and reflected light are some of the strongest contributors to the illusion of form.\r\n<h3>Mid-Tones</h3>\r\nNow using your lightest pencil (such as an HB) or lightest touch, begin filling in the half tones. Do this as lightly and carefully as possible. However, since almost all the remaining white space is mid-tone, feel free to fill it with a light uniform value in the same way you filled in your shadow shapes. Just remember that your lightest darks should still be darker than your darkest lights.\r\n\r\nOnce you’ve filled in your base mid-tones, you can begin working on some of the darker mid-tones. Give careful consideration to the forms. Ask yourself “Which way is the form turning?” and try to shade by making strokes parallel to the form. This will serve to reinforce its three-dimentionality as all your pencil strokes will be moving in the same direction as the form itself.\r\n\r\n[Image Ten Here]\r\n\r\nBeginning artists tend to think of the eraser only as a tool for getting rid of mistakes. This could not be farther from the truth. The eraser is as much a tool of creation as the pencil is, you just have to know how to use it.\r\n\r\nIn this instance, we’re going to use our eraser to give our image highlights. Take your eraser and carefully knock back some of the mid-tones wherever you see highlights. Be careful not to erase too much. The highlights should be placed strategically, wherever you feel they will create the most contrast to bring out the form.\r\n\r\nTIP: The highlights should be softer on the ear and harder on the earrings. Remember, different materials reflect light in different ways.\r\n<h2>The Final Refinement</h2>\r\nAt this stage, we could call the image done. However, usually at this point we as artists have been staring at the same piece of paper for so long that we almost don’t even see it anymore. Do yourself a favor at this stage and walk away for a few hours. This will allow you to come back and look at it again with fresh eyes, and fresh eyes will allow you to see things that you would not otherwise see.\r\n\r\nNow is the time to double check everything. Make sure your darks are as dark as you want them, your highlights and midtones as light as you want them. Reinforce and shapes or shading that may have gotten smudged or has faded over time.\r\n\r\nIf some areas seem a bit harsh or hard edged and you want to add some soft edges or smooth transitions, use a blending tool such as a blending stump, tortillion, or tissue to carefully smudge those areas of the drawing. Do this with caution. Not everything needs to be smooth, and a nice balance of smooth and hard transitions will add contrast and create visual interest in the image.\r\n\r\nRefine until you’re happy. Check the reference constantly. Just be aware that at some point you’ll have to take that last most difficult step and, for better or worse, call it done.\r\n\r\n[Final Image Here]\r\n<h2>Conclusion</h2>\r\nWe’ve come a long way together and I hope you’ve learned as much from this experience as I have, but our journey is not over. As artists, we must continue to push ourselves forward at every opportunity and draw constantly.\r\n\r\nTo truly learn to draw an ear you cannot simply do this tutorial once. Do it twice, three times, four times. Take what you’ve learned and try to apply it without the tutorial. Draw from other reference photographs, draw ears from your imagination. Once you’ve done all that and more, come back and do this tutorial a fifth or sixth time. See for yourself the difference.\r\n\r\nAlways save your work, all of it. Not matter how bad you think it is. If it’s something you put real time and effort into, an end in and of itself, hang on to it. There is no better feeling as an artist than looking back over your past work and seeing how much you’ve grown. And there’s no worse feeling than looking back at something you abandoned in frustration and realizing that it wasn’t nearly as bad as you thought.\r\n\r\nDrawing is a skill that you must constantly develop. Never stop learning, but never stop drawing what you care about either. Or put simply, never stop drawing.','How to Draw an Ear with Piercings','','inherit','closed','closed','','3790-revision-v1','','','2017-10-01 15:54:44','2017-10-01 22:54:44','',3790,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3790-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3793,2,'2017-11-22 02:00:50','2017-11-22 10:00:50','<center><iframe src=\"https://www.youtube.com/embed/j0T8fX-ilNs?rel=0\" width=\"960\" height=\"540\" frameborder=\"0\" allowfullscreen=\"allowfullscreen\"></iframe></center>\r\nHere is a time-lapse video of a detailed realistic pencil portrait I recently completed for members of the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/club/\">Let\'s Draw People Club</a>!\r\n\r\nThis portrait is of a woman I named \"Ann\". As you can tell from the video, I used a light box and grid to make a line drawing of \"Ann\" on Bristol board paper. Then I shaded in tones, blended tones for a realistic touch, and repeated this process several times with additional layers. I used a mechanical pencil for the entire drawing.\r\n\r\nWhat this video does not show is how I set up the grid on the computer and how I use a high-resolution version of the reference photograph with grid lines already in place on the computer. The full tutorial in the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/club/\">members\'</a> area includes all of this and more, including larger reference photos, the same grid I used available for you to print out and follow along, and over 16 hours of thorough, step-by-step verbal and visual instructions from start to finish on how to complete this portrait!\r\n\r\nWatch the video above for a small glimpse of my process. <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/club/\">Click here</a> to join the LDP Club and view the complete tutorial. Enjoy!\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3485\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"425\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/Ann-post-ref.jpg\"><img class=\"wp-image-3485 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/Ann-post-ref.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"425\" height=\"600\" /></a> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/nadino_info\">Nadino</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/06/Ann-series.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3730\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/06/Ann-series.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"481\" height=\"600\" /></a>','\"Ann\" Pencil Portrait Speed Drawing','','future','open','open','','ann-pencil-portrait-speed-drawing','','','2017-10-16 05:00:28','2017-10-16 12:00:28','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/?p=3793',0,'post','',0),(3922,2,'2017-10-02 20:20:45','2017-10-03 03:20:45','<center><iframe src=\"//www.youtube.com/embed/cpQDGSG_9qk?rel=0\" width=\"640\" height=\"360\" frameborder=\"0\" allowfullscreen=\"allowfullscreen\"></iframe></center>Here is a time-lapse video of a detailed realistic pencil portrait I recently completed for members of the Let\'s Draw People Club!\r\n\r\nThis portrait is of a woman I named \"Ann\". As you can tell from the video, I used a light box and grid to make a line drawing of \"Ann\" on Bristol board paper. Then I shaded in tones, blended tones for a realistic touch, and repeated this process several times with additional layers. I used a mechanical pencil for the entire drawing.\r\n\r\nWhat this video does not show is how I set up the grid on the computer and how I use a high-resolution version of the reference photograph with grid lines already in place on the computer. The full tutorial in the members\' area includes all of this and more, including larger reference photos, the same grid I used available for you to print out and follow along, and over 16 hours of thorough, step-by-step verbal and visual instructions from start to finish on how to complete this portrait!\r\n\r\nWatch the video above for a small glimpse of my process. For the complete tutorial, click here. Enjoy!\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/Ann-post-ref.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3485 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/05/Ann-post-ref.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"425\" height=\"600\" /></a></p>\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/06/Ann-series.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3730\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/06/Ann-series.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"481\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"></p>','\"Ann\" Pencil Portrait Speed Drawing','','inherit','closed','closed','','3793-revision-v1','','','2017-10-02 20:20:45','2017-10-03 03:20:45','',3793,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3793-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3794,2,'2017-10-01 16:17:54','2017-10-01 23:17:54','<center><iframe src=\"//www.youtube.com/embed/cpQDGSG_9qk?rel=0\" width=\"640\" height=\"360\" frameborder=\"0\" allowfullscreen=\"allowfullscreen\"></iframe></center>Here is a time-lapse video of a detailed realistic pencil portrait I recently completed for members of the Let\'s Draw People Club!\r\n\r\nThis portrait is of a woman I named \"Ann\". As you can tell from the video, I used a light box and grid to make a line drawing of \"Ann\" on Bristol board paper. Then I shaded in tones, blended tones for a realistic touch, and repeated this process several times with additional layers. I used a mechanical pencil for the entire drawing.\r\n\r\nWhat this video does not show is how I set up the grid on the computer and how I use a high-resolution version of the reference photograph with grid lines already in place on the computer. The full tutorial in the members\' area includes all of this and more, including larger reference photos, the same grid I used available for you to print out and follow along, and over 16 hours of thorough, step-by-step verbal and visual instructions from start to finish on how I completed this portrait!\r\n\r\nWatch the video above for a small glimpse of my process. For the complete tutorial, click here. Enjoy!\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_1135\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"456\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/01/elderly-man-in-hat-reference.jpg\"><img class=\"wp-image-1135\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/01/elderly-man-in-hat-reference.jpg\" alt=\"© Kelpfish | Dreamstime.com\" width=\"456\" height=\"686\" /></a> <strong> © <a href=\"http://www.dreamstime.com/kelpfish_info\">Kelpfish</a> | <a href=\"http://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></strong>[/caption]\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/01/elderly-man-in-hat.jpg\"><img class=\"alignnone wp-image-902\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/01/elderly-man-in-hat.jpg\" alt=\"elderly man in hat\" width=\"456\" height=\"568\" /></a></p>','\"Ann\" Pencil Portrait Speed Drawing','','inherit','closed','closed','','3793-revision-v1','','','2017-10-01 16:17:54','2017-10-01 23:17:54','',3793,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3793-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3795,2,'2017-10-21 02:34:21','2017-10-21 09:34:21','Do you ever want to draw more expressive people but aren’t sure where to start? Today we’ll learn how to draw a guy expressing fear. Art takes practice and muscle memory, so get your own drawing tools ready and follow along as we draw this scared guy!\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3862\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"600\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/learn-how-to-draw-a-guy-scared-out-of-his-mind.jpg\"><img class=\"wp-image-3862 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/learn-how-to-draw-a-guy-scared-out-of-his-mind-600x430.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"430\" /></a> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/afxhome_info\">Afxhome</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2>Getting Started</h2>\r\nStep 1 - To begin, let’s start with a circle and cross hairs. This is going to be the head of our frightened guy, so place it near the top of your drawing paper. Keep your hand loose when drawing the circle and move your arm from the elbow and shoulder rather than at the wrist. You don’t need to apply much pressure since these are only guidelines. We’ll be erasing them later.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-how-to-draw-a-guy-head.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3848\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-541x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"541\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Outlining</h2>\r\nStep 2 - Now we’ll be drawing the outline for the rest of our guy’s head and shoulders. Like the original circle, try to keep your hand loose when making these curvy shapes. These are all basic “C” shapes since we’re just outlining now. Don’t forget that you can rotate the paper to get an angle where you have more control.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-how-to-draw-a-guy-ears-neck-shoulders.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3849\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-how-to-draw-a-guy-ears-neck-shoulders-541x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"541\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 3 - Next let’s get those hands in place over his mouth. The main part of each hand is an oval at a slight angle. They are positioned a little lower than halfway over the bottom of the head oval. Then add “C” shapes on top of those ovals for where the fingers are going to be. You can see where the arms will connect between the hands and the loose arm/shoulder shapes from before.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-how-to-draw-a-guy-arms-and-hands.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3850\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-how-to-draw-a-guy-arms-and-hands-541x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"541\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 4 - Moving on, we’re going to add some <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">facial feature outlines</a>. The eyes should sit on the top of the cross hairs line from Step 1 with the eyebrows above them. The nose will sit at the bottom of the circle from Step 1. Don’t forget to also add the hairline! It should end around where the ears start.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-how-to-draw-a-guy-hair-eyes-nose.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3851\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-how-to-draw-a-guy-hair-eyes-nose-541x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"541\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 5 - Here we can safely erase our guidelines from the first few steps. Then we’ll add detail to the facial features (eyes, nose, and ears) and get those fingers on properly. Think of the fingers like little oval segments between each joint. You can look at your own for reference. Remember from this view that the thumbs are mostly obscured.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-how-to-draw-a-guy-fingers-eyes-ears.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3852\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-how-to-draw-a-guy-fingers-eyes-ears-541x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"541\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2>Shading</h2>\r\nStep 6 - Next is <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/take-the-stress-out-of-shading-with-these-pencil-shading-techniques/\">shading</a>! Let’s go ahead and shade in the hair, eyebrows, and the shadow on his face behind his hands. We want to add some shading to the eyes, ears, and nose. It’s also a good time to mark out where the lighter shadows will sit on the face and hands with light boundary lines.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-how-to-draw-a-guy-hair-shadow-eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3853\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-how-to-draw-a-guy-hair-shadow-eyes-541x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"541\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 7 - For this next step you may want to use a tissue or tortillion for blending. At this step, we’re going to be adding those lighter shadows around the face and hands in the areas we planned in the previous step. Think about how the light hits a face. The front of the forehead, the tip of the nose, and the cheekbones get most of the light, so the areas around them should be slightly shaded. You’re halfway through learning how to draw a guy looking scared!\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-how-to-draw-a-guy-shadows-and-dark-places.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3854\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-how-to-draw-a-guy-shadows-and-dark-places-541x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"541\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2>Highlighting and Shading</h2>\r\nStep 8 - After smudging our shadows to blended perfection, we need to erase some of the mess to make sure those shadows sit exactly in the right places. Pay careful attention to the creases of the face around the mouth, nose, and eyes. These should keep their shadows.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-how-to-draw-a-guy-highlights.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3855\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-how-to-draw-a-guy-highlights-541x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"541\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2>Clothing</h2>\r\nStep 9 - Now we’re going to give our guy some <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/picture-perfect-clothing-a-beginners-guide-to-sketching-clothes/\">clothes</a>! Outline the shape of his shirt. Note how fabric creases around different junctures of the body, like his armpits in this case. Also note that when people are scared, they often pull their arms in close. This will give the shirt some bundling and extra fabric around the chest area.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-how-to-draw-a-guy-shirt.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3856\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-how-to-draw-a-guy-shirt-541x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"541\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 10 - Let’s add some shading to the shirt like we did for the face and hands. Pay careful attention to creases and folds.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-how-to-draw-a-guy-more-shade.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3857\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-how-to-draw-a-guy-more-shade-541x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"541\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 11 -  Then go a little darker for the lines we really want to lock in. We’ll outline the face and hands and deepen the darkness of shadows we made earlier.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-how-to-draw-a-guy-darker-shadow-and-outlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3858\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-how-to-draw-a-guy-darker-shadow-and-outlines-541x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"541\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2>Full Figure Shading</h2>\r\nStep 12 - Next we’re going to add a layer of shadow over the whole figure. You can lightly shade with your pencil. After we get the base layer of shading down, we can go back and erase the areas we want to look highlighted.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-how-to-draw-a-guy-shadows-and-highlights.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3859\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-how-to-draw-a-guy-shadows-and-highlights-541x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"541\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 13 - Now we’ll use the same method of shading and erasing to add more detail. Notice we are focusing on really smoothing and blending those shadows, but we don’t want to lose the truly dark shadows like those of the ears and hand areas. The folds of the shirt and the arms are going to take the most attention here.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-how-to-draw-a-guy-shade-and-erase.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3860\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-how-to-draw-a-guy-shade-and-erase-541x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"541\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2>Final Touch-Ups</h2>\r\nStep 14 - This is the part where any last tweaks are made. For this step, we just want to sharpen and darken our lines. Once we’re happy with the work, we can add a few more highlights back in by erasing. Ta-dah!\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-how-to-draw-a-guy-scared.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3861\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-how-to-draw-a-guy-scared-541x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"541\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nNow you know how to draw a guy who looks scared! I hope you apply the skills learned from these steps in similar, future drawing projects. You may also choose to use this figure in a bigger scene. Above all, keep practicing!\r\n\r\n<em><strong><span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">Note</span>:</strong> I would like to thank artist <strong>Audrey Rosse</strong> for contributing her drawings and tips for this tutorial!</em>','Learn How to Draw a Guy Scared Out of His Mind','','publish','open','open','','learn-how-to-draw-a-guy-scared-out-of-his-mind','','','2017-10-12 21:03:53','2017-10-13 04:03:53','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/?p=3795',0,'post','',0),(3796,2,'2017-10-01 16:23:43','2017-10-01 23:23:43','Do you ever want to draw more expressive people but aren’t sure where to start? Today we’ll learn how to draw a guy expressing fear. Art takes practice and muscle memory, so get your own drawing tools ready and follow along as we draw this scared guy!\r\n<h2>Getting Started</h2>\r\nStep 1 - To begin, let’s start with a circle and cross hairs. This is going to be the head of our frightened guy, so place it near the top of your drawing paper. Keep your hand loose when drawing the circle and move your arm from the elbow and shoulder rather than at the wrist. You don’t need to apply much pressure since these are only guidelines. We’ll be erasing them later.\r\n<h2>Outlining</h2>\r\nStep 2 - Now we’ll be drawing the outline for the rest of our guy’s head and shoulders. Like the original circle, try to keep your hand loose when making these curvy shapes. These are all basic “C” shapes since we’re just outlining now. Don’t forget that you can rotate the paper to get an angle where you have more control.\r\n\r\nStep 3 - Next let’s get those hands in place over his mouth. The main part of each hand is an oval at a slight angle. They are positioned a little lower than halfway over the bottom of the head oval. Then add “C” shapes on top of those ovals for where the fingers are going to be. You can see where the arms will connect between the hands and the loose arm/shoulder shapes from before.\r\n\r\nStep 4 - Moving on, we’re going to add some facial feature outlines. The eyes should sit on the top of the cross hairs line from Step 1 with the eyebrows above them. The nose will sit at the bottom of the circle from Step 1. Don’t forget to also add the hairline! It should end around where the ears start.\r\n\r\nStep 5 - Here we can safely erase our guidelines from the first few steps. Then we’ll add detail to the facial features (eyes, nose, and ears) and get those fingers on properly. Think of the fingers like little oval segments between each joint. You can look at your own for reference. Remember from this view the thumbs are mostly obscured.\r\n<h2>Shading</h2>\r\nStep 6 - Next is shading! Let’s go ahead and shade in the hair, eyebrows, and the shadow on his face behind his hands. We want to add some shading to the eyes, ears, and nose. It’s also a good time to mark out where the lighter shadows will sit on the face and hands with light boundary lines.\r\n\r\nStep 7 - For this next step you may want to use a tissue or tortillion for blending. At this step, we’re going to be adding those lighter shadows around the face and hands in the areas we planned in the previous step. Think about how the light hits a face. The front of the forehead, the tip of the nose, and the cheekbones get most of the light, so the areas around them should be slightly shaded. You’re halfway through learning how to draw a guy looking scared!\r\n<h2>Highlighting and Shading</h2>\r\nStep 8 - After smudging our shadows to blended perfection, we need to erase some of the mess to make sure those shadows sit exactly in the right places. Pay careful attention to the creases of the face around the mouth, nose, and eyes. These should keep their shadows.\r\n<h2>Clothing</h2>\r\nStep 9 - Now we’re going to give our guy some clothes! Outline the shape of his shirt. Note how fabric creases around different junctures of the body, like his armpits in this case. Also note that when people are scared, they often pull their arms in close. This will give the shirt some bundling and extra fabric around the chest area.\r\n\r\nStep 10 - Let’s add some shading to the shirt like we did for the face and hands. Pay careful attention to creases and folds.\r\n\r\nStep 11 -  Then go a little darker for the lines we really want to lock in. We’ll outline the face and hands and deepen the darkness of shadows we made earlier.\r\n<h2>Full Figure Shading</h2>\r\nStep 12 - Next we’re going to add a layer of shadow over the whole figure. You can lightly shade with your pencil. After we get the base layer of shading down, we can go back and erase the areas we want to look highlighted.\r\n\r\nStep 13 - Now we’ll use the same method of shading and erasing to add more detail. Notice we are focusing on really smoothing and blending those shadows, but we don’t want to lose the truly dark shadows like those of the ears and hand areas. The folds of the shirt and the arms are going to take the most attention here.\r\n<h2>Final Touch-Ups</h2>\r\nStep 14 - This is the part where any last tweaks are made. For this step, we just want to sharpen and darken our lines. Once we’re happy with the work, we can add a few more highlights back in by erasing. Ta-dah!\r\n\r\nNow you know how to draw a guy who looks scared! I hope you apply the skills learned from these steps in similar, future drawing projects. You may also choose to use this figure in a bigger scene. Above all, keep practicing!','Learn How to Draw a Guy Scared Out of His Mind','','inherit','closed','closed','','3795-revision-v1','','','2017-10-01 16:23:43','2017-10-01 23:23:43','',3795,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3795-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3797,2,'2017-10-25 02:00:13','2017-10-25 09:00:13','<center><iframe src=\"https://www.youtube.com/embed/d-zTqlBYvuk?rel=0\" width=\"960\" height=\"540\" frameborder=\"0\" allowfullscreen=\"allowfullscreen\"></iframe></center>\r\nIn this tutorial of our never-ending quest for learning how to draw people, we are going to draw this image of a guy painting a wall. You can review the individual drawings as I go step-by-step to drawing the man, and you can also draw along by watching the video. Stop the video when you want, and review the drawing shots.\r\n\r\nUse this reference photo of the man painting the wall for this tutorial so you can follow along step-by-step and sketch in details as they appear in the photos below.\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3884\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"517\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/reference-photo-how-to-draw-a-guy-painting-the-wall.jpg\"><img class=\"wp-image-3884 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/reference-photo-how-to-draw-a-guy-painting-the-wall-517x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"517\" height=\"600\" /></a> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/godfer_info\">Godfer</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nWhen you are choosing what to draw, many times a complicated pose can make you shy away, but this drawing of a man painting a wall will show you that even a person in action can be tackled easily and with impressive results when you follow along with some simple step-by-step actions to take in your drawing. Go slowly and look carefully at each image.\r\n<h2>Set up Box Guidelines</h2>\r\nAs you can see in this first image, I have drawn three different-sized rectangles that represent the outer framework of the body of the man we are drawing. I took some measurements of the reference photo in order to draw the boxes in proper proportion to one another which will, in turn, maintain proper proportions of our final drawing.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-how-to-draw-a-guy-rectangles.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3863\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-how-to-draw-a-guy-rectangles-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\nIn the following directions, I’ll indicate the approximate measurements you’ll need for each box for a drawing the same size as mine. If you want to make a larger drawing, simply scale up as much as needed.\r\n\r\nFirst, draw a small rectangle near the top of the page that will be for the man’s head. This box should be 2 ½ inches tall by about 1 7/8 inches wide.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01a-how-to-draw-a-guy-rectangles.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3951\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01a-how-to-draw-a-guy-rectangles-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nBelow this box but with a half-inch overlap, and pushed an eighth of an inch to the right, draw a taller rectangular box for the man’s torso. This box should be 4 inches tall and 2 ½ inches wide.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01b-how-to-draw-a-guy-rectangles.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3952\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01b-how-to-draw-a-guy-rectangles-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nFor the third box, draw a large square to the left of the first two boxes, with a 1 5/16 inch overlap of the torso box as shown. Also, push the bottom of this box up about 3/8 of an inch higher than the bottom of the torso box. The top of this box will serve as the top of the paint roller and the bottom of the box will be where the guy’s elbow will touch.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01c-how-to-draw-a-guy-rectangles.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3953\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01c-how-to-draw-a-guy-rectangles-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nNow that we have these boxes, we can begin drawing some basic shapes inside.\r\n<h2>Draw Guidelines for the Face</h2>\r\nStart with the box on the top and draw an outline within this box for the head. Look at the reference photograph to shape the head and again at the reference photo to get an idea of the angle at which the head is turned.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02a-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-and-face-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3954\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02a-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-and-face-guidelines-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nWe’re going to begin adding some guidelines to this head to help <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">place the facial features</a>. Getting these proportional guidelines lightly in place will help you position the facial features correctly, so look carefully at where these are placed and duplicate these in your drawing.\r\n\r\nDraw a vertical line that will run through the center of the man’s face. This vertical line should also follow the curvature of the head.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02b-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-and-face-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3955\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02b-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-and-face-guidelines-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThen draw a horizontal line, again curved across the center. This guideline will help us place the eyes. Draw tiny tick marks along this guideline to place the inner and outer corner of each eye.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02c-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-and-face-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3956\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02c-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-and-face-guidelines-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nNext approximately halfway between the eye guideline and the chin should be a mark for the bottom of the nose. About a third of the way from this point to the chin should be another guideline for the mouth.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02d-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-and-face-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3957\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02d-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-and-face-guidelines-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nNow we’ll focus on some vertical guidelines under where the eyes will be. A guideline from the center of the eye downward will be for the corner of the mouth. Another guideline from the inner corner of the eye downward will be for the outer edge of the lower part of the nose.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02e-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-and-face-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3958\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02e-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-and-face-guidelines-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nNext draw two more horizontal guidelines above the line for the eyes. One will be for the eyebrows and the other for the hairline.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02f-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-and-face-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3959\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02f-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-and-face-guidelines-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nFinally extend the nose guideline all the way across the head. This line and the eye guideline will help to place the ear.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02g-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-and-face-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3960\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02g-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-and-face-guidelines-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Draw the Eyes and the Nose</h2>\r\nNow let’s move on to drawing the facial features that accompany these guidelines. Begin with the eyes and draw the outline. Then draw the details of the eyes within the outlines of the eyes, such as the pupil, the iris, the highlights, the lines under the eyes, the eyelids, and so on.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03a-how-to-draw-a-guy-eyes-and-nose.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3961\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03a-how-to-draw-a-guy-eyes-and-nose-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAfter the eyes come <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/drawing-eyebrows-like-a-boss/\">the eyebrows</a>. Use the guideline that’s just above the eye and draw the eyebrows on this guideline. Look at the reference photo to observe the thickness and curvature of the eyebrow around the eye, and curve appropriately in your drawing.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03b-how-to-draw-a-guy-eyes-and-nose.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3962\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03b-how-to-draw-a-guy-eyes-and-nose-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAfter the eyes is the nose. Look at the reference photograph to judge how far the tip of the nose should protrude from the face and where the tip of the nose should align with the man’s right eye. Carefully draw the nostril and bottom of the nose. The wing of the nose should line up with the inner corner of the man’s eye.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03c-how-to-draw-a-guy-eyes-and-nose.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3963\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03c-how-to-draw-a-guy-eyes-and-nose-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Draw More of the Face and Hair</h2>\r\nUse the guideline drawn earlier for the mouth to begin drawing the guy’s top lip. Also remember the guideline that falls from the center of the eye to help place the corner of the mouth. The man’s mouth is slightly open, so make sure to draw some of the visible teeth before moving on to the bottom lip.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-how-to-draw-a-guy-mouth.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3866\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-how-to-draw-a-guy-mouth-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\nAt this point, use a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/what-is-a-kneaded-eraser-heres-everything-you-ever-wanted-to-know/\">kneaded eraser</a> to carefully erase some of the guidelines around the facial features. Then, shape the outline of the face. Draw the contours around the eye, cheek, mouth and chin. Add details around the mouth where needed.\r\n\r\nAdd some volume to the eyebrows with quick, loose strokes of the pencil. Refer to the photo to obtain just the right thickness.\r\n\r\nStart <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/listen-up-to-learn-how-to-draw-ears/\">shaping the ear</a>, which should fall roughly between the guideline for the eyes and the guideline for the nose. Use the reference photo to draw the shapes within the ear.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-how-to-draw-a-guy-face-outline-eyebrows-ear.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3867\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-how-to-draw-a-guy-face-outline-eyebrows-ear-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\nErase the guidelines of the face, since we are finished with those.\r\n\r\nNow using the photo as your guide, draw in the rough outline of the hair, being careful not to make the lines look too smooth. Go back and forth over your original outline with short strokes to make the appearance of strands of hair. This will add to the realism.\r\n\r\nOn the top of the head, place the strokes going up and away from the face, to indicate an area with the hair is loose and a bit longer on top of his head.\r\n\r\nAdd sideburns down along the side of the ear and then follow up and around the ear, bringing the hair closer as you get toward the top of the ear line.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-how-to-draw-a-guy-hair-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3868\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-how-to-draw-a-guy-hair-outline-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStart putting details in the outline of the hair to better indicate the flow and direction of the man’s hair, including some light shading in some of the darker areas.\r\n\r\nWorking within the overall hairline you have created, draw clusters of short back and forth strokes to create small groupings of hair and shadow that make the hair look like it is wavy and full. Do this over the entire head of hair until you have filled in enough small clusters to give the effect of thick hair.\r\n\r\nApply pressure to your pencil while doing this, in an alternating fashion, so the strokes are not even, nor evenly placed. Make some strokes longer than others, some shorter, as well as applying more pressure to some strokes and less to others. This will give your hair a more realistic feel to it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-how-to-draw-a-guy-face-and-hair-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3869\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-how-to-draw-a-guy-face-and-hair-details-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nNow we can start adding some other details of the eyes, such as shading. While shading the pupils, keep the small circle for the highlight bright and free of the dark color. This adds to the natural effect of reflection of the eye. Keep the center portion of the pupil dark, and then shade the iris slightly lighter. We can also now draw subtle indications of the man’s eyelashes.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-how-to-draw-a-guy-pupils-and-eyelashes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3870\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-how-to-draw-a-guy-pupils-and-eyelashes-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Draw Below the Head</h2>\r\nLet’s bring our focus to the area below the man’s head now. We’ll start framing the neck and torso. Look at the reference photo to get an idea of the shape of the neckline.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-how-to-draw-a-guy-shoulder-and-neckline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3871\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-how-to-draw-a-guy-shoulder-and-neckline-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nDraw some of the lines on the man’s neck that form as he turns his head.\r\n\r\nSince we are finished with the box for the man’s head, we can erase that at this point.\r\n\r\nContinue to work on the guy’s shirt. Go over the area of the shoulder, and place more lines that will give a rounded effect to the top of the shoulder. Look for <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/picture-perfect-clothing-a-beginners-guide-to-sketching-clothes/\">seams and folds and creases</a> in the man’s shirt and draw those, as well as the slight curve we see along the guy’s spine.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-how-to-draw-a-guy-seams-and-folds.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3872\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-how-to-draw-a-guy-seams-and-folds-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Work on the Arm</h2>\r\nAfter completing the folds in the man’s shirt, draw the basic outline of the man’s arm. The point where the man’s hand is holding the handle of the paint roller is align to where his shoulder is.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-how-to-draw-a-guy-arm-and-hand-basic-shape.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3873\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-how-to-draw-a-guy-arm-and-hand-basic-shape-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nNext draw a long rectangular shape along the top of the big guide box for the paint roller. Soften up the corners of the rectangle to give it a more rounded, roller-like shape. Then, start to form the metal part of the paint roller’s handle that will lead from the roller to the plastic part of the handle.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-how-to-draw-a-guy-handle-and-roller-cover.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3874\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-how-to-draw-a-guy-handle-and-roller-cover-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd some detail into the roller itself to bring out some of its fuzzy texture. Similarly, with the metal part of the handle, draw a line inside, partially running the length of the metal to depict shininess. Then begin forming the shape characteristic of the plastic part of the handle.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-how-to-draw-a-guy-paint-roller.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3875\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-how-to-draw-a-guy-paint-roller-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the basic outline of the hand we drew to start forming the fingers, thumb, and knuckles. Since the fingers are bent away from us, there’s not too much to see as far as the fingers are concerned. Still, we can draw some light indications of shadow to add form to the part of the hand we do see.\r\n\r\nMake short, curved strokes to show where the knuckles are on the hand, and extend the index finger further toward the left than the knuckles. Remember, you should have three main bumps for knuckles, as your fourth finger is the index finger, which is slightly extended holding the handle. The thumb angles around the handle to the right, and the thumb and index finger create a V-design.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-how-to-draw-a-guy-hand.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3876\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-how-to-draw-a-guy-hand-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nKeep working your way down the wrist and forearm to better define the shape of the arm. Go over the arm and add in some additional curving to the area in the forearm to indicate the muscle. Outline the curve of the elbow going around the arm to create the proper contour.\r\n\r\nThen finish drawing the man’s sleeve. Add in the lines for the bottom of the shirt sleeve, and keep these at approximately a 40-degree angle. Extend the lines beyond the edge of the arm to show dimension and depth to the shirt sleeve.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-how-to-draw-a-guy-arm-and-sleeve.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3877\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-how-to-draw-a-guy-arm-and-sleeve-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Shade and Finish Up</h2>\r\nNow that we are done with the remaining guidelines, we can start to erase them. Clean up your drawing of stray lines carefully with your eraser, and carefully sweep away stray eraser pieces without touching your drawing so that you do not smear the drawing.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-how-to-draw-a-guy-erase-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3878\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-how-to-draw-a-guy-erase-guidelines-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\nNow it’s time to start looking at some final details.\r\n\r\nStarting at the back edge of the sleeve detail, draw light and irregular lines downward to indicate the seam edge of the shirt. These lines should be in short sections, two lines slightly separated, similar to the edge of the shirt, but much lighter and broken so they give the impression of folds in the fabric.\r\n\r\nAdd in contour lines going back and forth across these, darkening one or two where they cross over the seam here and there.\r\n\r\nFocus on the area under the man’s arm and shade the area where the guy’s arm is casting a shadow onto his shirt.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-how-to-draw-a-guy-seam-details-and-shadow.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3879\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-how-to-draw-a-guy-seam-details-and-shadow-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nDraw a light outline for the shape of the paint on the wall. Very lightly start to shade in the area on the wall that the roller has just painted, adding in a few horizontal lines in the same direction of the roller. Draw the lines right over to his face to make it appear that the paint goes beyond his face behind him. This will add depth to the drawing.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-how-to-draw-a-guy-paint-on-wall.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3880\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-how-to-draw-a-guy-paint-on-wall-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nFind some of the darker spots on the man’s hair and darken those areas up with more shading as needed. Add in short strokes to create more depth and dimension with darker tone. Lightly shade other areas of the man’s face and neck, notably under his chin.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-how-to-draw-a-guy-darker-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3881\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-how-to-draw-a-guy-darker-tones-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nLook for other areas that need additional shading, such as on the paint handle, on the wall next to his arm where is arm is casting a shadow, and on his arm.\r\n\r\nStart adding value to the man’s shirt. We’ll use a light crosshatch pattern by sketching lines at an angle in one direction then sketching more lines over these in the opposite direction. Continue applying addition layers of this crosshatch pattern over the man’s shirt to darken the value of his shirt.\r\n\r\nPay attention to which parts of the man’s shirt need to be darkened even further with shadow and shade in those areas.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-how-to-draw-a-guy-hatch-crosshatch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3882\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-how-to-draw-a-guy-hatch-crosshatch-600x338.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nTake a final look at the overall drawing. Add any finishing touches you feel are needed.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/final-scan-cropped-how-to-draw-a-guy-painting-the-wall.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3964\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/final-scan-cropped-how-to-draw-a-guy-painting-the-wall-476x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"476\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThat completes this tutorial of how to draw a guy painting the wall! Hopefully you found this post useful and you were able to draw along with me. Make sure you take any helpful pointers you picked up from this lesson and apply them to similar drawings of people in the future.','How to Draw a Guy Painting the Wall','','future','open','open','','how-to-draw-a-guy-painting-the-wall','','','2017-10-08 18:05:14','2017-10-09 01:05:14','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/?p=3797',0,'post','',0),(3798,2,'2017-10-01 17:17:25','2017-10-02 00:17:25','In this tutorial of our never-ending quest for learning how to draw people, we are going to draw this image of a guy painting a wall. You can review the individual drawings as I go step-by-step to drawing the man, and you can also draw along by watching the video. Stop the video when you want, and review the drawing shots.\r\n\r\nUse this reference photo of the man painting the wall for this tutorial so you can follow along step-by-step and sketch in details as they appear in the photos below.\r\n\r\nWhen you are choosing what to draw, many times a complicated pose can make you shy away, but this drawing of a man painting a wall will show you that even a person in action can be tackled easily and with impressive results when you follow along with some simple step-by-step actions to take in your drawing. Go slowly and look carefully at each image.\r\n<h2>Set up Box Guidelines</h2>\r\nAs you can see in this first image, I have drawn three different-sized rectangles that represent the outer framework of the body of the man we are drawing. I took some measurements of the reference photo in order to draw the boxes in proper proportion to one another which will, in turn, maintain proper proportions of our final drawing.\r\n\r\n1\r\n\r\nIn the following directions, I’ll indicate the approximate measurements you’ll need for each box for a drawing the same size as mine. If you want to make a larger drawing, simply scale up as much as needed.\r\n\r\nFirst, draw a small rectangle near the top of the page that will be for the man’s head. This box should be 2 ½ inches tall by about 1 7/8 inches wide.\r\n\r\n1A\r\n\r\nBelow this box but with a half-inch overlap, and pushed an eighth of an inch to the right, draw a taller rectangular box for the man’s torso. This box should be 4 inches tall and 2 ½ inches wide.\r\n\r\n1B\r\n\r\nFor the third box, draw a large square to the left of the first two boxes, with a 1 5/16 inch overlap of the torso box as shown. Also, push the bottom of this box up about 3/8 of an inch higher than the bottom of the torso box. The top of this box will serve as the top of the paint roller and the bottom of the box will be where the guy’s elbow will touch.\r\n\r\n1C\r\n\r\nNow that we have these boxes, we can begin drawing some basic shapes inside.\r\n<h2>Draw Guidelines for the Face</h2>\r\nStart with the box on the top and draw an outline within this box for the head. Look at the reference photograph to shape the head and again at the reference photo to get an idea of the angle at which the head is turned.\r\n\r\n2A\r\n\r\nWe’re going to begin adding some guidelines to this head to help place the facial features. Getting these proportional guidelines lightly in place will help you position the facial features correctly, so look carefully at where these are placed and duplicate these in your drawing.\r\n\r\nDraw a vertical line that will run through the center of the man’s face. This vertical line should also follow the curvature of the head.\r\n\r\n2B\r\n\r\nThen draw a horizontal line, again curved across the center. This guideline will help us place the eyes. Draw tiny tick marks along this guideline to place the inner and outer corner of each eye.\r\n\r\n2C\r\n\r\nNext approximately halfway between the eye guideline and the chin should be a mark for the bottom of the nose. About a third of the way from this point to the chin should be another guideline for the mouth.\r\n\r\n2D\r\n\r\nNow we’ll focus on some vertical guidelines under where the eyes will be. A guideline from the center of the eye downward will be for the corner of the mouth. Another guideline from the inner corner of the eye downward will be for the outer edge of the lower part of the nose.\r\n\r\n2E\r\n\r\nNext draw two more horizontal guidelines above the line for the eyes. One will be for the eyebrows and the other for the hairline.\r\n\r\n2F\r\n\r\nFinally extend the nose guideline all the way across the head. This line and the eye guideline will help to place the ear.\r\n\r\n2G\r\n<h2>Draw the Eyes and the Nose</h2>\r\nNow let’s move on to drawing the facial features that accompany these guidelines. Begin with the eyes and draw the outline. Then draw the details of the eyes within the outlines of the eyes, such as the pupil, the iris, the highlights, the lines under the eyes, the eyelids, and so on.\r\n\r\n3A\r\n\r\nAfter the eyes come the eyebrows. Use the guideline that’s just above the eye and draw the eyebrows on this guideline. Look at the reference photo to observe the thickness and curvature of the eyebrow around the eye, and curve appropriately in your drawing.\r\n\r\n3B\r\n\r\nAfter the eyes is the nose. Look at the reference photograph to judge how far the tip of the nose should protrude from the face and where the tip of the nose should align with the man’s right eye. Carefully draw the nostril and bottom of the nose. The wing of the nose should line up with the inner corner of the man’s eye.\r\n\r\n3C\r\n<h2>Draw More of the Face and Hair</h2>\r\nUse the guideline drawn earlier for the mouth to begin drawing the guy’s top lip. Also remember the guideline that falls from the center of the eye to help place the corner of the mouth. The man’s mouth is slightly open, so make sure to draw some of the visible teeth before moving on to the bottom lip.\r\n\r\n4\r\n\r\nAt this point, use a kneaded eraser to carefully erase some of the guidelines around the facial features. Then, shape the outline of the face. Draw the contours around the eye, cheek, mouth and chin. Add details around the mouth where needed.\r\n\r\nAdd some volume to the eyebrows with quick, loose strokes of the pencil. Refer to the photo to obtain just the right thickness.\r\n\r\nStart shaping the ear, which should fall roughly between the guideline for the eyes and the guideline for the nose. Use the reference photo to draw the shapes within the ear.\r\n\r\n5\r\n\r\nErase the guidelines of the face, since we are finished with those.\r\n\r\nNow using the photo as your guide, draw in the rough outline of the hair, being careful not to make the lines look too smooth. Go back and forth over your original outline with short strokes to make the appearance of strands of hair. This will add to the realism.\r\n\r\nOn the top of the head, place the strokes going up and away from the face, to indicate an area with the hair is loose and a bit longer on top of his head.\r\n\r\nAdd sideburns down along the side of the ear and then follow up and around the ear, bringing the hair closer as you get toward the top of the ear line.\r\n\r\n6\r\n\r\nStart putting details in the outline of the hair to better indicate the flow and direction of the man’s hair, including some light shading in some of the darker areas.\r\n\r\nWorking within the overall hairline you have created, draw clusters of short back and forth strokes to create small groupings of hair and shadow that make the hair look like it is wavy and full. Do this over the entire head of hair until you have filled in enough small clusters to give the effect of thick hair.\r\n\r\nApply pressure to your pencil while doing this, in an alternating fashion, so the strokes are not even, nor evenly placed. Make some strokes longer than others, some shorter, as well as applying more pressure to some strokes and less to others. This will give your hair a more realistic feel to it.\r\n\r\n7\r\n\r\nNow we can start adding some other details of the eyes, such as shading. While shading the pupils, keep the small circle for the highlight bright and free of the dark color. This adds to the natural effect of reflection of the eye. Keep the center portion of the pupil dark, and then shade the iris slightly lighter. We can also now draw subtle indications of the man’s eyelashes.\r\n\r\n8\r\n<h2>Draw Below the Head</h2>\r\nLet’s bring our focus to the area below the man’s head now. We’ll start framing the neck and torso. Look at the reference photo to get an idea of the shape of the neckline.\r\n\r\n9\r\n\r\nDraw some of the lines on the man’s neck that form as he turns his head.\r\n\r\nSince we are finished with the box for the man’s head, we can erase that at this point.\r\n\r\nContinue to work on the guy’s shirt. Go over the area of the shoulder, and place more lines that will give a rounded effect to the top of the shoulder. Look for seams and folds and creases in the man’s shirt and draw those, as well as the slight curve we see along the guy’s spine.\r\n\r\n10\r\n<h2>Work on the Arm</h2>\r\nAfter completing the folds in the man’s shirt, draw the basic outline of the man’s arm. The point where the man’s hand is holding the handle of the paint roller is align to where his shoulder is.\r\n\r\n11\r\n\r\nNext draw a long rectangular shape along the top of the big guide box for the paint roller. Soften up the corners of the rectangle to give it a more rounded, roller-like shape. Then, start to form the metal part of the paint roller’s handle that will lead from the roller to the plastic part of the handle.\r\n\r\n12\r\n\r\nAdd some detail into the roller itself to bring out some of its fuzzy texture. Similarly, with the metal part of the handle, draw a line inside, partially running the length of the metal to depict shininess. Then begin forming the shape characteristic of the plastic part of the handle.\r\n\r\n13\r\n\r\nUse the basic outline of the hand we drew to start forming the fingers, thumb, and knuckles. Since the fingers are bent away from us, there’s not too much to see as far as the fingers are concerned. Still, we can draw some light indications of shadow to add form to the part of the hand we do see.\r\n\r\nMake short, curved strokes to show where the knuckles are on the hand, and extend the index finger further toward the left than the knuckles. Remember, you should have three main bumps for knuckles, as your fourth finger is the index finger, which is slightly extended holding the handle. The thumb angles around the handle to the right, and the thumb and index finger create a V-design.\r\n\r\n14\r\n\r\nKeep working your way down the wrist and forearm to better define the shape of the arm. Go over the arm and add in some additional curving to the area in the forearm to indicate the muscle. Outline the curve of the elbow going around the arm to create the proper contour.\r\n\r\nThen finish drawing the man’s sleeve. Add in the lines for the bottom of the shirt sleeve, and keep these at approximately a 40-degree angle. Extend the lines beyond the edge of the arm to show dimension and depth to the shirt sleeve.\r\n\r\n15\r\n<h2>Shade and Finish Up</h2>\r\nNow that we are done with the remaining guidelines, we can start to erase them. Clean up your drawing of stray lines carefully with your eraser, and carefully sweep away stray eraser pieces without touching your drawing so that you do not smear the drawing.\r\n\r\n16\r\n\r\nNow it’s time to start looking at some final details.\r\n\r\nStarting at the back edge of the sleeve detail, draw light and irregular lines downward to indicate the seam edge of the shirt. These lines should be in short sections, two lines slightly separated, similar to the edge of the shirt, but much lighter and broken so they give the impression of folds in the fabric.\r\n\r\nAdd in contour lines going back and forth across these, darkening one or two where they cross over the seam here and there.\r\n\r\nFocus on the area under the man’s arm and shade the area where the guy’s arm is casting a shadow onto his shirt.\r\n\r\n17\r\n\r\nDraw a light outline for the shape of the paint on the wall. Very lightly start to shade in the area on the wall that the roller has just painted, adding in a few horizontal lines in the same direction of the roller. Draw the lines right over to his face to make it appear that the paint goes beyond his face behind him. This will add depth to the drawing.\r\n\r\n18\r\n\r\nFind some of the darker spots on the man’s hair and darken those areas up with more shading as needed. Add in short strokes to create more depth and dimension with darker tone. Lightly shade other areas of the man’s face and neck, notably under his chin.\r\n\r\n19\r\n\r\nLook for other areas that need additional shading, such as on the paint handle, on the wall next to his arm where is arm is casting a shadow, and on his arm.\r\n\r\nStart adding value to the man’s shirt. We’ll use a light crosshatch pattern by sketching lines at an angle in one direction then sketching more lines over these in the opposite direction. Continue applying addition layers of this crosshatch pattern over the man’s shirt to darken the value of his shirt.\r\n\r\nPay attention to which parts of the man’s shirt need to be darkened even further with shadow and shade in those areas.\r\n\r\n20\r\n\r\nTake a final look at the overall drawing. Add any finishing touches you feel are needed.\r\n\r\nThat completes this tutorial of how to draw a guy painting the wall! Hopefully you found this post useful and you were able to draw along with me. Make sure you take any helpful pointers you picked up from this lesson and apply them to similar drawings of people in the future.','How to Draw a Guy Painting the Wall','','inherit','closed','closed','','3797-revision-v1','','','2017-10-01 17:17:25','2017-10-02 00:17:25','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3797-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3799,2,'2017-10-28 02:25:21','2017-10-28 09:25:21','In this tutorial, I will be teaching you how to draw a lady. More specifically, I’ll teach you how to draw a lady who is eating a breakfast bar. This might seem oddly niche, but the techniques that I will teach you in this tutorial can help you figure out how to draw women in various settings who are engaging in different behaviors.\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3910\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"450\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/reference-photo-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"wp-image-3910 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/reference-photo-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/martinlee58_info\">Martinlee58</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nFirst, we will need drawing paper and pencils. For this drawing, a mechanical pencil with 0.5mm and 0.7mm lead was used, as well as a 7B pencil. An eraser may also be handy just in case you make mistakes along the way. Once you’ve got all your supplies, continue along with me to learn how to draw a woman eating a breakfast bar!\r\n<h2>Draw the Outline and Shade the Eyes</h2>\r\nFirst, draw an outline of the shape and size of the head. The head should take up just about as much space on your paper and it does in the reference photo.\r\n\r\nAfter you’ve drawn the outline, create two lines for where the eyes and mouth are placed, and add a basic outline of the hand.\r\n\r\nDraw all of this as light as possible with a 0.5mm pencil.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3885\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nOutline the woman’s basic features, such as the fingers, fingernails, hair, mouth, eyes, and nose in proportion to the size of the head.\r\n\r\nFeel free to use something to measure out the right location of all of these features. Also keep in mind that the woman’s head is slightly turned away from you, so the eyes and other features won’t be directly in the middle.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3886\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nFocus more on drawing the eyes in their proper location and draw some more detail around them. Make the outlines darker to indicate simple shadows and draw an extra line just above the right eye for the eyelid. Above that, draw the eyebrows.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3887\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nContour the eyes and eyebrows in more detail by <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-an-eye-realistically-part-2-of-4/\">shading around the eyelids and in the inner eye</a>, and by darkening the eyebrows. Color in the iris, but leave a small white section on the left of the pupil for the shine spot. Further, create some soft lines under the eye.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3888\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAfter the eyes are positioned properly and shaded, turn your focus to the nose. The nose must be in the right position in relation to the eyes and mouth, otherwise it will look a bit strange. If you already outlined it in the right position, make the lines a bit thicker and add some shadow on the left side and where the nostrils are located.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3889\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd in darker lines for the clothes and body shape. At this point, you should clearly define where the woman’s shoulders, <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-a-blouse-when-you-know-nothing-about-blouses/\">blouse collar</a>, and undershirt collar are located. You should also add in the suggestion of the shoulder seam on the woman’s shoulder and the lines created by her arm.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3890\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Add Detail to the Hair</h2>\r\nCreate the outline of the woman’s hair. Follow the shape of her hair and its natural waves around the face and shoulders according to the reference picture. However, remember not to distort the face while adding this and always keep the pencil lines soft.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3891\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nTo create depth within the hair, start adding several lines to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-hair-brunette-and-blonde/\">indicate how the hair is moving</a> around the face and shoulders. These lines should also be kept relatively soft and can be done rather quickly. Don’t worry too much about this part; the lines are just to help guide you during shading, they aren’t final.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3892\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Shade the Hand, Breakfast Bar, and Mouth</h2>\r\nSwitch to a 0.7mm pencil and start contouring the hand. The darkest shadows will be on the thumb just below the breakfast bar and under the fingers. Shade around the fingernails, as well, to create depth and add some shading to show where the woman’s wrist is and where her palm is creased.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3893\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nContinue adding shadow to the hand by drawing in the crease lines at the base of the thumb. The center of the palm also needs more shading to show where it creases and the fingers all need shading to appear three-dimensional. You can should also start adding some shading to the breakfast bar near the woman’s fingertips.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3894\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nKeep shading along the breakfast bar as you get closer to the woman’s mouth. There should be a line roughly one-fifth up from the bottom of the breakfast bar. This indicates that the bar is 3D as opposed to it being a two-dimensional object.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3895\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStart on the woman’s mouth. Shape the lips first and make sure they are in proportion with the face. The ends of the mouth should be roughly in line with the lines coming down from the woman’s nose.\r\n\r\nNext <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/this-childhood-shortcut-will-show-you-how-to-draw-teeth/\">shape the teeth</a>. You’ll have more top teeth to draw in than bottom teeth. And the top teeth should be longer than the bottom ones.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3896\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAfter the mouth and teeth are outlined, begin shading. The lips are dark because the woman in the reference picture is wearing lipstick. They may be lighter if you are drawing them with no lipstick. Meanwhile, the teeth are lightly shaded around the edges and along the gums. Don’t forget to shade the inside of the mouth.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3897\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Shade the Head and Neck</h2>\r\nPlace slight shadows on the neck underneath the woman’s chin. These shadows should be very light - we’ll darken it later on. Also shade the woman’s ear. Most of it is covered by her hair, so you just need to shade darkly under the earlobe and around the earring.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3898\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nGo back to the hair and add in more lines. These lines should be closer together and may vary in darkness. It is often best to begin with smaller portions of hair, such as the hair below the ear and the hair on the woman’s right side. Also add some shading to the woman’s undershirt and her chest. Make sure the shirt’s collar is clearly visible.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3899\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nKeep adding lines to the hair. Check where the hair is placed in the reference picture and add lines according to how the hair is arranged. For this section, it may be best to start at the part, which should in the middle of the woman’s face. The hair at the center of the part should curve downward slightly to indicate that the hair is parted.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3900\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nPlace lines completely throughout the hair. Keep the lines of the front strands darker than the lines in the back, but make sure you make some lines a bit darker around the curls in the woman’s hair. Once you have all the hair strands drawn in, most of the shoulder line should be covered.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3901\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nReturn to the eyes and add more contrast. Make the pupil and eyelids darker, but keep the highlight that you placed in both irises earlier. Lengthen the eyelashes a bit to make them more visible and add shadows around at the edges of the eyes and in the inner corner around the nose.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3902\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finish Shading the Rest of the Picture</h2>\r\nPlaces shadows throughout the entire picture. This includes adding some shadow around the nose and bridge of the nose, on the cheek and on the arm. You also need to shade around some of the creases in the woman’s clothing.\r\n\r\nAt this point, you can stop drawing and you’ll still have a beautiful picture. However, the next several steps really help add detail and shading.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3903\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nSwitch to your 7B pencil and begin darkening some of the shadows. Place darker lines throughout the woman’s hair. And go back to some shaded areas to make them appear closer to black.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3904\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nReturn to the hair and start adding volume and depth. Fill in the entire area with darker strands, but make sure you have some contrast so the hair doesn’t look flat. The hair in the very front should be slightly lighter to indicate light.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3905\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nDo this on the other side of the head, as well. All of the hair on this side should be kept dark since the woman’s face keeps in in shadow. However, some areas are darker than others due to overlapping. For example, the section of hair right on the shoulder is darker than the curl just above it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3906\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nGo back over the entire picture and make the shadows on the head, neck, and arm more visible. As you add more shading to the face, remember that the area facing farthest from you is dark, so the shadows around the mouth and nose should be darker. Also add some shading to the woman’s clothing, particularly around the creases and folds created by her arms.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/23-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3907\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/23-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAt this point, you can start adding in the darkest blacks. Shade in the hair more by creating some dark black lines along the back. Add a few in the front, as well, so the hair doesn’t look two-toned. Color the undershirt black and darken some of the areas around the woman’s mouth and eyes. For the highlights in the irises, use a white pencil to create contrast.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/24-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3908\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/24-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd more shading in accordance to the reference picture until you have a final drawing that you are happy with. I added more shadow around the woman’s face and forehead to create a more 3D appearance. I also shaded the breakfast bar more completely and added more depth to the hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/25-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3909\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/25-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Conclusion</h2>\r\nAnd there you have it! A lesson about how to draw a lady.\r\n\r\nAs I mentioned earlier, the techniques that you learned in this tutorial will likely come up again as you continue to learn how to draw people. Even though this tutorial taught you how to draw a lady, don’t be afraid to apply these techniques to other drawings, including animal or landscape drawings.\r\n\r\nBefore I go, let me add a few quick tips for next time:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>If you had some trouble getting the shading right with this tutorial, consider printing out your next reference picture in black and white. This makes it easier to see the shades you need and helps create a more accurate photograph.</li>\r\n 	<li>Work with natural light to get the most accurate shades.</li>\r\n 	<li>If you are right-handing, let the light come from the left side.</li>\r\n 	<li>And, while you draw, place a paper under your hand. This keeps you from smudging your drawing and keeps your hand cleaner.</li>\r\n</ul>\r\n<em><strong>Note:</strong> I would like to thank artist <strong>Lumjete Havolli</strong> for contributing her drawings and tips for this tutorial!</em>','How to Draw a Lady Eating a Breakfast Bar','','future','open','open','','how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-15 20:54:43','2017-10-16 03:54:43','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/?p=3799',0,'post','',0),(3801,2,'2017-10-01 17:34:25','2017-10-02 00:34:25','In this tutorial, I will be teaching you how to draw a lady. More specifically, I’ll teach you how to draw a lady who is eating a breakfast bar. This might seem oddly niche, but the techniques that I will teach you in this tutorial can help you figure out how to draw women in various settings who are engaging in different behaviors.\r\n\r\nFor this, you need a 0.5, 0.7, and B7 pencil and, obviously, some paper. An eraser may also be handy just in case you make mistakes along the way. Once you’ve got all your supplies, continue along with me to learn how to draw a woman eating a breakfast bar!\r\n<h2>Draw the Outline and Shade the Eyes</h2>\r\n(Picture 1) First, draw an outline of the shape and size of the head. The head should take up just about as much space on your paper and it does in the reference photo.\r\n\r\nAfter you’ve drawn the outline, create two lines for where the eyes and mouth are placed, and add a basic outline of the hand.\r\n\r\nDraw all of this as light as possible with a 0.5 pencil.\r\n\r\n(Picture 2) Outline the woman’s basic features, such as the fingers, fingernails, hair, mouth, eyes, and nose in proportion to the size of the head.\r\n\r\nFeel free to use something to measure out the right location of all of these features. Also keep in mind that the woman’s head is slightly turned away from you, so the eyes and other features won’t be directly in the middle.\r\n\r\n(Picture 3) Focus more on drawing the eyes in their proper location and draw some more detail around them. Make the outlines darker to indicate simple shadows and draw an extra line just above the right eye for the eyelid. Above that, draw the eyebrows.\r\n\r\n(Picture 4) Contour the eyes and eyebrows in more detail by shading around the eyelids and in the inner eye, and by darkening the eyebrows. Color in the iris, but leave a small white section on the left of the pupil for the shine spot. Further, create some soft lines under the eye.\r\n\r\n(Picture 5) After the eyes are positioned properly and shaded, turn your focus to the nose. The nose must be in the right position in relation to the eyes and mouth, otherwise it will look a bit strange. If you already outlined it in the right position, make the lines a bit thicker and add some shadow on the left side and where the nostrils are located.\r\n\r\n(Picture 6) Add in darker lines for the clothes and body shape. At this point, you should clearly define where the woman’s shoulders, blouse collar, and undershirt collar are located. You should also add in the suggestion of the shoulder seam on the woman’s shoulder and the lines created by her arm.\r\n<h2>Add Detail to the Hair</h2>\r\n(Picture 7) Create the outline of the woman’s hair. Follow the shape of her hair and its natural waves around the face and shoulders according to the reference picture. However, remember not to distort the face while adding this and always keep the pencil lines soft.\r\n\r\n(Picture 8) To create depth within the hair, start adding several lines to indicate how the hair is moving around the face and shoulders. These lines should also be kept relatively soft and can be done rather quickly. Don’t worry too much about this part; the lines are just to help guide you during shading, they aren’t final.\r\n<h2>Shade the Hand, Breakfast Bar, and Mouth</h2>\r\n(Picture 9) Switch to a 0.7 pencil and start contouring the hand. The darkest shadows will be on the thumb just below the breakfast bar and under the fingers. Shade around the fingernails, as well, to create depth and add some shading to show where the woman’s wrist is and where her palm is creased.\r\n\r\n(Picture 10) Continue adding shadow to the hand by drawing in the crease lines at the base of the thumb. The center of the palm also needs more shading to show where it creases and the fingers all need shading to appear three-dimensional. You can should also start adding some shading to the breakfast bar near the woman’s fingertips.\r\n\r\n(Picture 11) Keep shading along the breakfast bar as you get closer to the woman’s mouth. There should be a line roughly one-fifth up from the bottom of the breakfast bar. This indicates that the bar is 3D as opposed to it being a two-dimensional object.\r\n\r\n(Picture 12) Start on the woman’s mouth. Shape the lips first and make sure they are in proportion with the face. The ends of the mouth should be roughly in line with the lines coming down from the woman’s nose.\r\n\r\nNext shape the teeth. You’ll have more top teeth to draw in than bottom teeth. And the top teeth should be longer than the bottom ones.\r\n\r\n(Picture 13) After the mouth and teeth are outlined, begin shading. The lips are dark because the woman in the reference picture is wearing lipstick. They may be lighter if you are drawing them with no lipstick. Meanwhile, the teeth are lightly shaded around the edges and along the gums. Don’t forget to shade the inside of the mouth.\r\n<h2>Shade the Head and Neck</h2>\r\n(Picture 14) Place slight shadows on the neck underneath the woman’s chin. These shadows should be very light - we’ll darken it later on. Also shade the woman’s ear. Most of it is covered by her hair, so you just need to shade darkly under the earlobe and around the earring.\r\n\r\n(Picture 15) Go back to the hair and add in more lines. These lines should be closer together and may vary in darkness. It is often best to begin with smaller portions of hair, such as the hair below the ear and the hair on the woman’s right side. Also add some shading to the woman’s undershirt and her chest. Make sure the shirt’s collar is clearly visible.\r\n\r\n(Picture 16) Keep adding lines to the hair. Check where the hair is placed in the reference picture and add lines according to how the hair is arranged. For this section, it may be best to start at the part, which should in the middle of the woman’s face. The hair at the center of the part should curve downward slightly to indicate that the hair is parted.\r\n\r\n(Picture 17) Place lines completely throughout the hair. Keep the lines of the front strands darker than the lines in the back, but make sure you make some lines a bit darker around the curls in the woman’s hair. Once you have all the hair strands drawn in, most of the shoulder line should be covered.\r\n\r\n(Picture 18) Return to the eyes and add more contrast. Make the pupil and eyelids darker, but keep the highlight that you placed in both irises earlier. Lengthen the eyelashes a bit to make them more visible and add shadows around at the edges of the eyes and in the inner corner around the nose.\r\n<h2>Finish Shading the Rest of the Picture</h2>\r\n(Picture 19) Places shadows throughout the entire picture. This includes adding some shadow around the nose and bridge of the nose, on the cheek and on the arm. You also need to shade around some of the creases in the woman’s clothing.\r\n\r\nAt this point, you can stop drawing and you’ll still have a beautiful picture. However, the next several steps really help add detail and shading.\r\n\r\n(Picture 20) Switch to your B7 pencil and begin darkening some of the shadows. Place darker lines throughout the woman’s hair. And go back to some shaded areas to make them appear closer to black.\r\n\r\n(Picture 21) Return to the hair and start adding volume and depth. Fill in the entire area with darker strands, but make sure you have some contrast so the hair doesn’t look flat. The hair in the very front should be slightly lighter to indicate light.\r\n\r\n(Picture 22) Do this on the other side of the head, as well. All of the hair on this side should be kept dark since the woman’s face keeps in in shadow. However, some areas are darker than others due to overlapping. For example, the section of hair right on the shoulder is darker than the curl just above it.\r\n\r\n(Picture 23) Go back over the entire picture and make the shadows on the head, neck, and arm more visible. As you add more shading to the face, remember that the area facing farthest from you is dark, so the shadows around the mouth and nose should be darker. Also add some shading to the woman’s clothing, particularly around the creases and folds created by her arms.\r\n\r\n(Picture 24) At this point, you can start adding in the darkest blacks. Shade in the hair more by creating some dark black lines along the back. Add a few in the front, as well, so the hair doesn’t look two-toned. Color the undershirt black and darken some of the areas around the woman’s mouth and eyes. For the highlights in the irises, use a white pencil to create contrast.\r\n\r\n(Picture 25) Add more shading in accordance to the reference picture until you have a final drawing that you are happy with. I added more shadow around the woman’s face and forehead to create a more 3D appearance. I also shaded the breakfast bar more completely and added more depth to the hair.\r\n<h2>Conclusion</h2>\r\nAnd there you have it! A lesson about how to draw a lady.\r\n\r\nAs I mentioned earlier, the techniques that you learned in this tutorial will likely come up again as you continue to learn how to draw people. Even though this tutorial taught you how to draw a lady, don’t be afraid to apply these techniques to other drawings, including animal or landscape drawings.\r\n\r\nBefore I go, let me add a few quick tips for next time:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>If you had some trouble getting the shading right with this tutorial, consider printing out your next reference picture in black and white. This makes it easier to see the shades you need and helps create a more accurate photograph.</li>\r\n 	<li>Work with natural light to get the most accurate shades.</li>\r\n 	<li>If you are right-handing, let the light come from the left side.</li>\r\n 	<li>And, while you draw, place a paper under your hand. This keeps you from smudging your drawing and keeps your hand cleaner.</li>\r\n</ul>','How to Draw a Lady Eating a Breakfast Bar','','inherit','closed','closed','','3799-revision-v1','','','2017-10-01 17:34:25','2017-10-02 00:34:25','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3799-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3800,2,'2017-10-01 17:29:07','2017-10-02 00:29:07','In this tutorial, I will be teaching you how to draw a lady. More specifically, I’ll teach you how to draw a lady who is eating a breakfast bar. This might seem oddly niche, but the techniques that I will teach you in this tutorial can help you figure out how to draw women in various settings who are engaging in different behaviors.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nFor this, you need a 0.5, 0.7, and B7 pencil and, obviously, some paper. An eraser may also be handy just in case you make mistakes along the way. Once you’ve got all your supplies, continue along with me to learn how to draw a woman eating a breakfast bar!\r\n<h2>Draw the Outline and Shade the Eyes</h2>\r\n(Picture 1) First, draw an outline of the shape and size of the head. The head should take up just about as much space on your paper and it does in the reference photo.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAfter you’ve drawn the outline, create two lines for where the eyes and mouth are placed, and add a basic outline of the hand.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nDraw all of this as light as possible with a 0.5 pencil.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 2) Outline the woman’s basic features, such as the fingers, fingernails, hair, mouth, eyes, and nose in proportion to the size of the head.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nFeel free to use something to measure out the right location of all of these features. Also keep in mind that the woman’s head is slightly turned away from you, so the eyes and other features won’t be directly in the middle.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 3) Focus more on drawing the eyes in their proper location and draw some more detail around them. Make the outlines darker to indicate simple shadows and draw an extra line just above the right eye for the eyelid. Above that, draw the eyebrows.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 4) Contour the eyes and eyebrows in more detail by shading around the eyelids and in the inner eye, and by darkening the eyebrows. Color in the iris, but leave a small white section on the left of the pupil for the shine spot. Further, create some soft lines under the eye.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 5) After the eyes are positioned properly and shaded, turn your focus to the nose. The nose must be in the right position in relation to the eyes and mouth, otherwise it will look a bit strange. If you already outlined it in the right position, make the lines a bit thicker and add some shadow on the left side and where the nostrils are located.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 6) Add in darker lines for the clothes and body shape. At this point, you should clearly define where the woman’s shoulders, blouse collar, and undershirt collar are located. You should also add in the suggestion of the shoulder seam on the woman’s shoulder and the lines created by her arm.\r\n<h1>Add Detail to the Hair</h1>\r\n(Picture 7) Create the outline of the woman’s hair. Follow the shape of her hair and its natural waves around the face and shoulders according to the reference picture. However, remember not to distort the face while adding this and always keep the pencil lines soft.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 8) To create depth within the hair, start adding several lines to indicate how the hair is moving around the face and shoulders. These lines should also be kept relatively soft and can be done rather quickly. Don’t worry too much about this part; the lines are just to help guide you during shading, they aren’t final.\r\n<h1>Shade the Hand, Breakfast Bar, and Mouth</h1>\r\n(Picture 9) Switch to a 0.7 pencil and start contouring the hand. The darkest shadows will be on the thumb just below the breakfast bar and under the fingers. Shade around the fingernails, as well, to create depth and add some shading to show where the woman’s wrist is and where her palm is creased.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 10) Continue adding shadow to the hand by drawing in the crease lines at the base of the thumb. The center of the palm also needs more shading to show where it creases and the fingers all need shading to appear three-dimensional. You can should also start adding some shading to the breakfast bar near the woman’s fingertips.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 11) Keep shading along the breakfast bar as you get closer to the woman’s mouth. There should be a line roughly one-fifth up from the bottom of the breakfast bar. This indicates that the bar is 3D as opposed to it being a two-dimensional object.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 12) Start on the woman’s mouth. Shape the lips first and make sure they are in proportion with the face. The ends of the mouth should be roughly in line with the lines coming down from the woman’s nose.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nNext shape the teeth. You’ll have more top teeth to draw in than bottom teeth. And the top teeth should be longer than the bottom ones.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 13) After the mouth and teeth are outlined, begin shading. The lips are dark because the woman in the reference picture is wearing lipstick. They may be lighter if you are drawing them with no lipstick. Meanwhile, the teeth are lightly shaded around the edges and along the gums. Don’t forget to shade the inside of the mouth.\r\n<h1>Shade the Head and Neck</h1>\r\n(Picture 14) Place slight shadows on the neck underneath the woman’s chin. These shadows should be very light - we’ll darken it later on. Also shade the woman’s ear. Most of it is covered by her hair, so you just need to shade darkly under the earlobe and around the earring.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 15) Go back to the hair and add in more lines. These lines should be closer together and may vary in darkness. It is often best to begin with smaller portions of hair, such as the hair below the ear and the hair on the woman’s right side. Also add some shading to the woman’s undershirt and her chest. Make sure the shirt’s collar is clearly visible.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 16) Keep adding lines to the hair. Check where the hair is placed in the reference picture and add lines according to how the hair is arranged. For this section, it may be best to start at the part, which should in the middle of the woman’s face. The hair at the center of the part should curve downward slightly to indicate that the hair is parted.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 17) Place lines completely throughout the hair. Keep the lines of the front strands darker than the lines in the back, but make sure you make some lines a bit darker around the curls in the woman’s hair. Once you have all the hair strands drawn in, most of the shoulder line should be covered.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 18) Return to the eyes and add more contrast. Make the pupil and eyelids darker, but keep the highlight that you placed in both irises earlier. Lengthen the eyelashes a bit to make them more visible and add shadows around at the edges of the eyes and in the inner corner around the nose.\r\n<h1>Finish Shading the Rest of the Picture</h1>\r\n(Picture 19) Places shadows throughout the entire picture. This includes adding some shadow around the nose and bridge of the nose, on the cheek and on the arm. You also need to shade around some of the creases in the woman’s clothing.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAt this point, you can stop drawing and you’ll still have a beautiful picture. However, the next several steps really help add detail and shading.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 20) Switch to your B7 pencil and begin darkening some of the shadows. Place darker lines throughout the woman’s hair. And go back to some shaded areas to make them appear closer to black.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 21) Return to the hair and start adding volume and depth. Fill in the entire area with darker strands, but make sure you have some contrast so the hair doesn’t look flat. The hair in the very front should be slightly lighter to indicate light.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 22) Do this on the other side of the head, as well. All of the hair on this side should be kept dark since the woman’s face keeps in in shadow. However, some areas are darker than others due to overlapping. For example, the section of hair right on the shoulder is darker than the curl just above it.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 23) Go back over the entire picture and make the shadows on the head, neck, and arm more visible. As you add more shading to the face, remember that the area facing farthest from you is dark, so the shadows around the mouth and nose should be darker. Also add some shading to the woman’s clothing, particularly around the creases and folds created by her arms.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 24) At this point, you can start adding in the darkest blacks. Shade in the hair more by creating some dark black lines along the back. Add a few in the front, as well, so the hair doesn’t look two-toned. Color the undershirt black and darken some of the areas around the woman’s mouth and eyes. For the highlights in the irises, use a white pencil to create contrast.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n(Picture 25) Add more shading in accordance to the reference picture until you have a final drawing that you are happy with. I added more shadow around the woman’s face and forehead to create a more 3D appearance. I also shaded the breakfast bar more completely and added more depth to the hair.\r\n<h1>Conclusion</h1>\r\nAnd there you have it! A lesson about how to draw a lady.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAs I mentioned earlier, the techniques that you learned in this tutorial will likely come up again as you continue to learn how to draw people. Even though this tutorial taught you how to draw a lady, don’t be afraid to apply these techniques to other drawings, including animal or landscape drawings.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nBefore I go, let me add a few quick tips for next time:\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>If you had some trouble getting the shading right with this tutorial, consider printing out your next reference picture in black and white. This makes it easier to see the shades you need and helps create a more accurate photograph.</li>\r\n 	<li>Work with natural light to get the most accurate shades.</li>\r\n 	<li>If you are right-handing, let the light come from the left side.</li>\r\n 	<li>And, while you draw, place a paper under your hand. This keeps you from smudging your drawing and keeps your hand cleaner.</li>\r\n</ul>','How to Draw a Lady Eating a Breakfast Bar','','inherit','closed','closed','','3799-revision-v1','','','2017-10-01 17:29:07','2017-10-02 00:29:07','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3799-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3802,2,'2017-10-01 17:40:47','2017-10-02 00:40:47','In this tutorial, I will be teaching you how to draw a lady. More specifically, I’ll teach you how to draw a lady who is eating a breakfast bar. This might seem oddly niche, but the techniques that I will teach you in this tutorial can help you figure out how to draw women in various settings who are engaging in different behaviors.\r\n\r\nFor this, you need a 0.5, 0.7, and B7 pencil and, obviously, some paper. An eraser may also be handy just in case you make mistakes along the way. Once you’ve got all your supplies, continue along with me to learn how to draw a woman eating a breakfast bar!\r\n<h2>Draw the Outline and Shade the Eyes</h2>\r\nFirst, draw an outline of the shape and size of the head. The head should take up just about as much space on your paper and it does in the reference photo.\r\n\r\nAfter you’ve drawn the outline, create two lines for where the eyes and mouth are placed, and add a basic outline of the hand.\r\n\r\nDraw all of this as light as possible with a 0.5 pencil.\r\n\r\n(Picture 1)\r\n\r\nOutline the woman’s basic features, such as the fingers, fingernails, hair, mouth, eyes, and nose in proportion to the size of the head.\r\n\r\nFeel free to use something to measure out the right location of all of these features. Also keep in mind that the woman’s head is slightly turned away from you, so the eyes and other features won’t be directly in the middle.\r\n\r\n(Picture 2)\r\n\r\nFocus more on drawing the eyes in their proper location and draw some more detail around them. Make the outlines darker to indicate simple shadows and draw an extra line just above the right eye for the eyelid. Above that, draw the eyebrows.\r\n\r\n(Picture 3)\r\n\r\nContour the eyes and eyebrows in more detail by shading around the eyelids and in the inner eye, and by darkening the eyebrows. Color in the iris, but leave a small white section on the left of the pupil for the shine spot. Further, create some soft lines under the eye.\r\n\r\n(Picture 4)\r\n\r\nAfter the eyes are positioned properly and shaded, turn your focus to the nose. The nose must be in the right position in relation to the eyes and mouth, otherwise it will look a bit strange. If you already outlined it in the right position, make the lines a bit thicker and add some shadow on the left side and where the nostrils are located.\r\n\r\n(Picture 5)\r\n\r\nAdd in darker lines for the clothes and body shape. At this point, you should clearly define where the woman’s shoulders, blouse collar, and undershirt collar are located. You should also add in the suggestion of the shoulder seam on the woman’s shoulder and the lines created by her arm.\r\n\r\n(Picture 6)\r\n<h2>Add Detail to the Hair</h2>\r\nCreate the outline of the woman’s hair. Follow the shape of her hair and its natural waves around the face and shoulders according to the reference picture. However, remember not to distort the face while adding this and always keep the pencil lines soft.\r\n\r\n(Picture 7)\r\n\r\nTo create depth within the hair, start adding several lines to indicate how the hair is moving around the face and shoulders. These lines should also be kept relatively soft and can be done rather quickly. Don’t worry too much about this part; the lines are just to help guide you during shading, they aren’t final.\r\n\r\n(Picture 8)\r\n<h2>Shade the Hand, Breakfast Bar, and Mouth</h2>\r\nSwitch to a 0.7 pencil and start contouring the hand. The darkest shadows will be on the thumb just below the breakfast bar and under the fingers. Shade around the fingernails, as well, to create depth and add some shading to show where the woman’s wrist is and where her palm is creased.\r\n\r\n(Picture 9)\r\n\r\nContinue adding shadow to the hand by drawing in the crease lines at the base of the thumb. The center of the palm also needs more shading to show where it creases and the fingers all need shading to appear three-dimensional. You can should also start adding some shading to the breakfast bar near the woman’s fingertips.\r\n\r\n(Picture 10)\r\n\r\nKeep shading along the breakfast bar as you get closer to the woman’s mouth. There should be a line roughly one-fifth up from the bottom of the breakfast bar. This indicates that the bar is 3D as opposed to it being a two-dimensional object.\r\n\r\n(Picture 11)\r\n\r\nStart on the woman’s mouth. Shape the lips first and make sure they are in proportion with the face. The ends of the mouth should be roughly in line with the lines coming down from the woman’s nose.\r\n\r\nNext shape the teeth. You’ll have more top teeth to draw in than bottom teeth. And the top teeth should be longer than the bottom ones.\r\n\r\n(Picture 12)\r\n\r\nAfter the mouth and teeth are outlined, begin shading. The lips are dark because the woman in the reference picture is wearing lipstick. They may be lighter if you are drawing them with no lipstick. Meanwhile, the teeth are lightly shaded around the edges and along the gums. Don’t forget to shade the inside of the mouth.\r\n\r\n(Picture 13)\r\n<h2>Shade the Head and Neck</h2>\r\nPlace slight shadows on the neck underneath the woman’s chin. These shadows should be very light - we’ll darken it later on. Also shade the woman’s ear. Most of it is covered by her hair, so you just need to shade darkly under the earlobe and around the earring.\r\n\r\n(Picture 14)\r\n\r\nGo back to the hair and add in more lines. These lines should be closer together and may vary in darkness. It is often best to begin with smaller portions of hair, such as the hair below the ear and the hair on the woman’s right side. Also add some shading to the woman’s undershirt and her chest. Make sure the shirt’s collar is clearly visible.\r\n\r\n(Picture 15)\r\n\r\nKeep adding lines to the hair. Check where the hair is placed in the reference picture and add lines according to how the hair is arranged. For this section, it may be best to start at the part, which should in the middle of the woman’s face. The hair at the center of the part should curve downward slightly to indicate that the hair is parted.\r\n\r\n(Picture 16)\r\n\r\nPlace lines completely throughout the hair. Keep the lines of the front strands darker than the lines in the back, but make sure you make some lines a bit darker around the curls in the woman’s hair. Once you have all the hair strands drawn in, most of the shoulder line should be covered.\r\n\r\n(Picture 17)\r\n\r\nReturn to the eyes and add more contrast. Make the pupil and eyelids darker, but keep the highlight that you placed in both irises earlier. Lengthen the eyelashes a bit to make them more visible and add shadows around at the edges of the eyes and in the inner corner around the nose.\r\n\r\n(Picture 18)\r\n<h2>Finish Shading the Rest of the Picture</h2>\r\nPlaces shadows throughout the entire picture. This includes adding some shadow around the nose and bridge of the nose, on the cheek and on the arm. You also need to shade around some of the creases in the woman’s clothing.\r\n\r\nAt this point, you can stop drawing and you’ll still have a beautiful picture. However, the next several steps really help add detail and shading.\r\n\r\n(Picture 19)\r\n\r\nSwitch to your B7 pencil and begin darkening some of the shadows. Place darker lines throughout the woman’s hair. And go back to some shaded areas to make them appear closer to black.\r\n\r\n(Picture 20)\r\n\r\nReturn to the hair and start adding volume and depth. Fill in the entire area with darker strands, but make sure you have some contrast so the hair doesn’t look flat. The hair in the very front should be slightly lighter to indicate light.\r\n\r\n(Picture 21)\r\n\r\nDo this on the other side of the head, as well. All of the hair on this side should be kept dark since the woman’s face keeps in in shadow. However, some areas are darker than others due to overlapping. For example, the section of hair right on the shoulder is darker than the curl just above it.\r\n\r\n(Picture 22)\r\n\r\nGo back over the entire picture and make the shadows on the head, neck, and arm more visible. As you add more shading to the face, remember that the area facing farthest from you is dark, so the shadows around the mouth and nose should be darker. Also add some shading to the woman’s clothing, particularly around the creases and folds created by her arms.\r\n\r\n(Picture 23)\r\n\r\nAt this point, you can start adding in the darkest blacks. Shade in the hair more by creating some dark black lines along the back. Add a few in the front, as well, so the hair doesn’t look two-toned. Color the undershirt black and darken some of the areas around the woman’s mouth and eyes. For the highlights in the irises, use a white pencil to create contrast.\r\n\r\n(Picture 24)\r\n\r\nAdd more shading in accordance to the reference picture until you have a final drawing that you are happy with. I added more shadow around the woman’s face and forehead to create a more 3D appearance. I also shaded the breakfast bar more completely and added more depth to the hair.\r\n\r\n(Picture 25)\r\n<h2>Conclusion</h2>\r\nAnd there you have it! A lesson about how to draw a lady.\r\n\r\nAs I mentioned earlier, the techniques that you learned in this tutorial will likely come up again as you continue to learn how to draw people. Even though this tutorial taught you how to draw a lady, don’t be afraid to apply these techniques to other drawings, including animal or landscape drawings.\r\n\r\nBefore I go, let me add a few quick tips for next time:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>If you had some trouble getting the shading right with this tutorial, consider printing out your next reference picture in black and white. This makes it easier to see the shades you need and helps create a more accurate photograph.</li>\r\n 	<li>Work with natural light to get the most accurate shades.</li>\r\n 	<li>If you are right-handing, let the light come from the left side.</li>\r\n 	<li>And, while you draw, place a paper under your hand. This keeps you from smudging your drawing and keeps your hand cleaner.</li>\r\n</ul>','How to Draw a Lady Eating a Breakfast Bar','','inherit','closed','closed','','3799-revision-v1','','','2017-10-01 17:40:47','2017-10-02 00:40:47','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3799-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3803,2,'2017-10-01 18:41:03','2017-10-02 01:41:03','<center><iframe src=\"//www.youtube.com/embed/cpQDGSG_9qk?rel=0\" width=\"640\" height=\"360\" frameborder=\"0\" allowfullscreen=\"allowfullscreen\"></iframe></center>Here is a time-lapse video of a detailed realistic pencil portrait I recently completed for members of the Let\'s Draw People Club!\r\n\r\nThis portrait is of a woman I named \"Ann\". As you can tell from the video, I used a light box and grid to make a line drawing of \"Ann\" on Bristol board paper. Then I shaded in tones, blended tones for a realistic touch, and repeated this process several times with additional layers. I used a mechanical pencil for the entire drawing.\r\n\r\nWhat this video does not show is how I set up the grid on the computer and how I use a high-resolution version of the reference photograph with grid lines already in place on the computer. The full tutorial in the members\' area includes all of this and more, including larger reference photos, the same grid I used available for you to print out and follow along, and over 16 hours of thorough, step-by-step verbal and visual instructions from start to finish on how to complete this portrait!\r\n\r\nWatch the video above for a small glimpse of my process. For the complete tutorial, click here. Enjoy!\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_1135\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"456\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/01/elderly-man-in-hat-reference.jpg\"><img class=\"wp-image-1135\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/01/elderly-man-in-hat-reference.jpg\" alt=\"© Kelpfish | Dreamstime.com\" width=\"456\" height=\"686\" /></a> <strong> © <a href=\"http://www.dreamstime.com/kelpfish_info\">Kelpfish</a> | <a href=\"http://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></strong>[/caption]\r\n<p style=\"text-align: center;\"><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/01/elderly-man-in-hat.jpg\"><img class=\"alignnone wp-image-902\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/01/elderly-man-in-hat.jpg\" alt=\"elderly man in hat\" width=\"456\" height=\"568\" /></a></p>','\"Ann\" Pencil Portrait Speed Drawing','','inherit','closed','closed','','3793-revision-v1','','','2017-10-01 18:41:03','2017-10-02 01:41:03','',3793,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3793-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3804,2,'2017-10-04 04:43:05','2017-10-04 11:43:05','If you are new to the world of art and do not know how to use a blending stump, then you have come to the right place.\n\nThis is a tool that is made up of a cylindrical piece of paper which has been compressed and has a point situated on each end. When I first learned about blending stumps, I did not know that they came in a variety of sizes and had various levels of sharpness. The reason for this is that different images require different blending needs and the variations in sizes and shapes help to provide enhancement to images.\n\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stumps-in-jar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3805\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stumps-in-jar-200x300.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"200\" height=\"300\" /></a>\n\nThe reason that these stumps have two ends is so that the other can be used when one side becomes dirty. These blending stumps are not so expensive, and a blending stump can easily be replaced or cleaned when it becomes filthy. Keep reading to learn more about how to use this simple but effective tool.\n<h2>Creating Realistic Images with a Blending Stump</h2>\nMany artists utilize blending stumps to help smudge pencil or charcoal on pieces of paper. I use the stumps to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/simple-drawing-techniques-for-realistic-pencil-portraits/\">create realistic drawings</a> that can be used to drag the graphite across paper. This helps to develop a fine layer of graphite that will reflect light.\n\nBlending stumps come in handy when it comes to creating graduated highlights such as differences in strands of hair, creating an eye, or even <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/take-the-stress-out-of-shading-with-these-pencil-shading-techniques/\">shading a drawing</a>. I as an artist use it in the blending of backgrounds and textures, to sharpen images, to draw with like a pencil (with the excess graphite accumulated), and even erase highlights as needed.\n\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stump-to-shade-background.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3806\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stump-to-shade-background.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\n<h3>Blended Shading Technique</h3>\nThis is a widely used method that is applied by numerous pencil artists. Graphite is a popular medium used in this technique because it is easy to work with. It is simple to lay down the graphite and use a blending stump to create almost anything.\n\nI have had excellent results in terms of creating facial images with this technique. What you can do is play around with the blending stump to create different types of shades and textures. If you are just now learning how to draw people, then while creating a facial image make sure that you use smooth shading. This helps to develop flawless and gorgeous appearing skin.\n<h3>Circulism Technique</h3>\nThis is a widely used shading method which uses a blending stump to create small circles. I think that blending with this method is quite meticulous, but the end results are always worth it. It is excellent for creating realistic skin and can allow you to develop light and dark tones.\n<h3>Creating Dark Black Images</h3>\nDeveloping dark black images can be troublesome for many people, but when you have a blending stump you cannot go wrong. If you would like to create a dark black image, use charcoal or a sharp pencil so that you can easily blend with the stump later on. When dealing with a dark tone you will always get a shine as the end result. This occurs because the paper tends to absorb graphite developing a realistic image.\n<h3>Loose and Tight Crosshatching</h3>\nThe main purpose of crosshatching is to create overlapping lines. To begin you must draw overlapping lines that will overlap the first set. Do this many times to create tones to shade later on. You can develop crosshatching to be tight or loose depending on your needs and the type of image you are creating.\n\nIf you just so happen to be drawing a portrait of a person with a beloved pet, keep in mind that loose crosshatching comes in handy for the fur, because there are some sections of fur that are wider than the others. After creating the lines, a blending stump can be used to shade in the areas slowly and develop a connection though blending.\n<h2>Methods on How to Use a Blending Stump</h2>\n<h3>Smudging in Circular Motions</h3>\nUse the end of the stub to create a variety of elements in your drawings. The way I do this is by using small circular motions, which allow me to add depth to images to create a realistic feel.\n<h3>Blending of Shades and Tones</h3>\nUse a clean blending stump to smear the graphite in a forward and backward motion so that you can add depth to your image. The purpose of this is to make sure that the tones and shades are blended together evenly. When you do this, do not worry and be calm because it may take a bit long, but when you see the finished image you are bound to be pleased with your efforts.\n<h3>Dark Value Images for a Smooth Finish</h3>\nIf you would like to achieve a nice dark value image while utilizing the blending stump, then look for the white dots between the graphite. When you see the grooves in the paper, add dark values. At this time use a blending stump to spread the graphite and fill in the grooves. This will add a smooth finish to the drawing.\n<h3>Light Value Images to Add Depth</h3>\nIn order to create light value images, it is essential to make sure that the blending stump is clean during the process. When creating a light value image, sand the stump a couple of times as you blend. This will keep it tidy and add depth to your image almost instantaneously.\n<h2>Difference Between Blending Stumps and Tortillions</h2>\nSome beginning artists have a difficult time when it comes to choosing to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/blending-stumps/\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\">buy a blending stump</a> or a tortillion. The reason for this is that both of them are different tools that help to create similar effects. If you know how to use each of these tools properly, you will be able to develop a flawless drawing or sketch that will stand out and look exactly how you would like it to look, regardless of which tool you use.\n\nWhen it comes to appearance, both of these tools resemble each other. They are both made out of paper and artists use them in terms of blending graphite and pastel. The main difference has to do with the paper weight and size.\n\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stump-and-tortillion.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3807\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stump-and-tortillion.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"311\" /></a>\n\nThe blending stumps are a lot larger in size and have points on both ends for the convenience of users. With the blending stump, you do not have to get another one when one side becomes ruined. What you can do is use the other end. The tortillions are a lot shorter and have one point at the tip. What this does is helps to create precise images.\n\nPersonally, I typically use blending stumps to blend large areas with broad strokes. I use tortillions to blend smaller, tight areas. These small areas can be blended with a blending stump as well. In many ways, deciding between a blending stump and a tortillion boils down to personal preference.\n<h2>Some Tips to Blending Pencil with a Stump</h2>\nIf you plan on shading with pencil, you will need a blending tool such as a blending stump or even a tortillion. Below are some tips that will help you during the blending process:\n<ol>\n 	<li>Whenever I use a blending stump, I usually go in side-to-side or circular motions, consistent with the pencil strokes. This allows me to keep the shading nice and controlled.</li>\n 	<li>I hold the blending tool in a downward direction to help adjust the pressure that I must use on it. I believe this is a great technique that will allow you to gain control of the tool and develop a wonderful image.</li>\n 	<li>Remember that graphite has the tendency to stick to the blending tool. Being aware of this and how you applied your tones on the paper will determine whether you should shade from light to dark or dark to light. If you’re just blending graphite, blend light to dark. If you want to use the graphite accumulated on your blending stump to add tones to some lighter areas and even draw in light details, blend dark to light.</li>\n</ol>\n<h2>Cleaning a Blending Stump</h2>\nIf you want to try to keep the life of your blending stump as long as possible, then I will provide you with some advice on how to do so. Make sure that you have all these items and follow the process carefully.\n\nItems Needed:\n<ul>\n 	<li>Scissors</li>\n 	<li>Sand paper or a nail file</li>\n 	<li>A dirty blending stump</li>\n</ul>\nSteps Involved:\n<ol>\n 	<li>The first step is to use the sand paper or nail file to slowly and gently rub the edge of the blending stump. This helps to remove excess lead that is present on the stump and make it clear again.</li>\n 	<li>After you do this, you will have a clear stump, but you will see that the edges may become frayed and loose pieces of paper may hang out from the sides. Use your scissors to cut these loose pieces off.</li>\n 	<li>I suggest that you clean each of the ends once or twice before you actually cut them away. By doing this, the blending stump will last longer and will make blending a lot easier on your part.</li>\n</ol>\n<h2>Blending Stumps Help to Create Smooth Images</h2>\nBlending stumps come in handy for larger areas that need to be blended such as backgrounds, prominent facial features, skin tones and so forth. They can also be used in smaller areas that require detail. Blending stumps add a smooth appearance to the image. When you use this tool, make sure that you use it carefully and in a slow motion.\n<h2>Homemade Blending Stump</h2>\nIf you are in need of a blending stump and do not want to purchase one, then I have included step-by-step instructions on how to easily make one.\n<ol>\n 	<li>Select the type of paper that you would like to use in order to make the blending stump. Try to find paper that can be rolled easily and not cause you much of a problem.</li>\n 	<li>Make sure that you cut the paper down so that the total length goes from the end of your index finger knuckle to the tip. Make sure that you allow the longer side to be intact as this will provide more paper to roll and lead to a better blending stump.</li>\n 	<li>If you have decided to use a hard form of paper (writing paper or copy paper), make some small folds and roll it, but if you note that the paper is soft (tissue or toilet paper) just begin by rolling it.</li>\n 	<li>When rolling, make sure that it is done tightly. If you roll it too loose, there is a chance of the stump becoming floppy. Do not make this mistake, as you will not be able to get a grip on it.</li>\n 	<li>Roll the stump so that you see only one inch that is left to roll. This is the area where you will create the point.</li>\n 	<li>Apply glue on the inside of the inch that you left off and also on the rolled part.</li>\n 	<li>Use sharp scissors to cut off the end of the stump so that it is smooth.</li>\n 	<li>Get a pencil sharpener to sharpen the side that you have cut so that you can get it to a rough point.</li>\n 	<li>Your blending stump is ready to use.</li>\n</ol>\nWhen you apply these methods and techniques, you will become comfortable using a blending stump in no time. I hope you will take the methods and techniques I have taught you for how to use a blending stump and apply them in the creation of your next image. While using this tool, make sure that you take your time and do not rush into the blending process. If you work your way slowing through the process, then you will get a realistic appearing image which the viewers of your artwork will adore.','How to Use a Blending Stump for Realistic Effects','','inherit','closed','closed','','3785-autosave-v1','','','2017-10-04 04:43:05','2017-10-04 11:43:05','',3785,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3785-autosave-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3805,2,'2017-10-01 21:18:41','2017-10-02 04:18:41','','blending-stumps-in-jar','','inherit','open','closed','','blending-stumps-in-jar','','','2017-10-01 21:18:41','2017-10-02 04:18:41','',3785,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stumps-in-jar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3806,2,'2017-10-01 21:20:09','2017-10-02 04:20:09','','blending-stump-to-shade-background','','inherit','open','closed','','blending-stump-to-shade-background','','','2017-10-01 21:20:09','2017-10-02 04:20:09','',3785,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stump-to-shade-background.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3807,2,'2017-10-01 21:21:22','2017-10-02 04:21:22','','blending-stump-and-tortillion','','inherit','open','closed','','blending-stump-and-tortillion','','','2017-10-01 21:21:22','2017-10-02 04:21:22','',3785,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stump-and-tortillion.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3808,2,'2017-10-01 21:23:38','2017-10-02 04:23:38','If you are new to the world of art and do not know how to use a blending stump, then you have come to the right place.\r\n\r\nThis is a tool that is made up of a cylindrical piece of paper which has been compressed and has a point situated on each end. When I first learned about blending stumps, I did not know that they came in a variety of sizes and had various levels of sharpness. The reason for this is that different images require different blending needs and the variations in sizes and shapes help to provide enhancement to images.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stumps-in-jar.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3805\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stumps-in-jar-200x300.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"200\" height=\"300\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThe reason that these stumps have two ends is so that the other can be used when one side becomes dirty. These blending stumps are not so expensive, and a blending stump can easily be replaced or cleaned when it becomes filthy. Keep reading to learn more about how to use this simple but effective tool.\r\n<h2>Creating Realistic Images with a Blending Stump</h2>\r\nMany artists utilize blending stumps to help smudge pencil or charcoal on pieces of paper. I use the stumps to create realistic drawings that can be used to drag the graphite across paper. This helps to develop a fine layer of graphite that will reflect light.\r\n\r\nBlending stumps come in handy when it comes to creating graduated highlights such as differences in strands of hair, creating an eye, or even shading a drawing. I as an artist use it in the blending of backgrounds and textures, to sharpen images, to draw with like a pencil (with the excess graphite accumulated), and even erase highlights as needed.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stump-to-shade-background.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3806\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stump-to-shade-background.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"338\" /></a>\r\n<h3>Blended Shading Technique</h3>\r\nThis is a widely used method that is applied by numerous pencil artists. Graphite is a popular medium used in this technique because it is easy to work with. It is simple to lay down the graphite and use a blending stump to create almost anything.\r\n\r\nI have had excellent results in terms of creating facial images with this technique. What you can do is play around with the blending stump to create different types of shades and textures. If you are just now learning how to draw people, then while creating a facial image make sure that you use smooth shading. This helps to develop flawless and gorgeous appearing skin.\r\n<h3>Circulism Technique</h3>\r\nThis is a widely used shading method which uses a blending stump to create small circles. I think that blending with this method is quite meticulous, but the end results are always worth it. It is excellent for creating realistic skin and can allow you to develop light and dark tones.\r\n<h3>Creating Dark Black Images</h3>\r\nDeveloping dark black images can be troublesome for many people, but when you have a blending stump you cannot go wrong. If you would like to create a dark black image, use charcoal or a sharp pencil so that you can easily blend with the stump later on. When dealing with a dark tone you will always get a shine as the end result. This occurs because the paper tends to absorb graphite developing a realistic image.\r\n<h3>Loose and Tight Crosshatching</h3>\r\nThe main purpose of crosshatching is to create overlapping lines. To begin you must draw overlapping lines that will overlap the first set. Do this many times to create tones to shade later on. You can develop crosshatching to be tight or loose depending on your needs and the type of image you are creating.\r\n\r\nIf you just so happen to be drawing a portrait of a person with a beloved pet, keep in mind that loose crosshatching comes in handy for the fur, because there are some sections of fur that are wider than the others. After creating the lines, a blending stump can be used to shade in the areas slowly and develop a connection though blending.\r\n<h2>Methods on How to Use a Blending Stump</h2>\r\n<h3>Smudging in Circular Motions</h3>\r\nUse the end of the stub to create a variety of elements in your drawings. The way I do this is by using small circular motions, which allow me to add depth to images to create a realistic feel.\r\n<h3>Blending of Shades and Tones</h3>\r\nUse a clean blending stump to smear the graphite in a forward and backward motion so that you can add depth to your image. The purpose of this is to make sure that the tones and shades are blended together evenly. When you do this, do not worry and be calm because it may take a bit long, but when you see the finished image you are bound to be pleased with your efforts.\r\n<h3>Dark Value Images for a Smooth Finish</h3>\r\nIf you would like to achieve a nice dark value image while utilizing the blending stump, then look for the white dots between the graphite. When you see the grooves in the paper, add dark values. At this time use a blending stump to spread the graphite and fill in the grooves. This will add a smooth finish to the drawing.\r\n<h3>Light Value Images to Add Depth</h3>\r\nIn order to create light value images, it is essential to make sure that the blending stump is clean during the process. When creating a light value image, sand the stump a couple of times as you blend. This will keep it tidy and add depth to your image almost instantaneously.\r\n<h2>Difference Between Blending Stumps and Tortillions</h2>\r\nSome beginning artists have a difficult time when it comes to choosing to buy a blending stump or a tortillion. The reason for this is that both of them are different tools that help to create similar effects. If you know how to use each of these tools properly, you will be able to develop a flawless drawing or sketch that will stand out and look exactly how you would like it to look, regardless of which tool you use.\r\n\r\nWhen it comes to appearance, both of these tools resemble each other. They are both made out of paper and artists use them in terms of blending graphite and pastel. The main difference has to do with the paper weight and size.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stump-and-tortillion.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3807\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/blending-stump-and-tortillion.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"600\" height=\"311\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThe blending stumps are a lot larger in size and have points on both ends for the convenience of users. With the blending stump, you do not have to get another one when one side becomes ruined. What you can do is use the other end. The tortillions are a lot shorter and have one point at the tip. What this does is helps to create precise images.\r\n\r\nPersonally, I typically use blending stumps to blend large areas with broad strokes. I use tortillions to blend smaller, tight areas. These small areas can be blended with a blending stump as well. In many ways, deciding between a blending stump and a tortillion boils down to personal preference.\r\n<h2>Some Tips to Blending Pencil with a Stump</h2>\r\nIf you plan on shading with pencil, you will need a blending tool such as a blending stump or even a tortillion. Below are some tips that will help you during the blending process:\r\n<ol>\r\n 	<li>Whenever I use a blending stump, I usually go in side-to-side or circular motions, consistent with the pencil strokes. This allows me to keep the shading nice and controlled.</li>\r\n 	<li>I hold the blending tool in a downward direction to help adjust the pressure that I must use on it. I believe this is a great technique that will allow you to gain control of the tool and develop a wonderful image.</li>\r\n 	<li>Remember that graphite has the tendency to stick to the blending tool. Being aware of this and how you applied your tones on the paper will determine whether you should shade from light to dark or dark to light. If you’re just blending graphite, blend light to dark. If you want to use the graphite accumulated on your blending stump to add tones to some lighter areas and even draw in light details, blend dark to light.</li>\r\n</ol>\r\n<h2>Cleaning a Blending Stump</h2>\r\nIf you want to try to keep the life of your blending stump as long as possible, then I will provide you with some advice on how to do so. Make sure that you have all these items and follow the process carefully.\r\n\r\nItems Needed:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>Scissors</li>\r\n 	<li>Sand paper or a nail file</li>\r\n 	<li>A dirty blending stump</li>\r\n</ul>\r\nSteps Involved:\r\n<ol>\r\n 	<li>The first step is to use the sand paper or nail file to slowly and gently rub the edge of the blending stump. This helps to remove excess lead that is present on the stump and make it clear again.</li>\r\n 	<li>After you do this, you will have a clear stump, but you will see that the edges may become frayed and loose pieces of paper may hang out from the sides. Use your scissors to cut these loose pieces off.</li>\r\n 	<li>I suggest that you clean each of the ends once or twice before you actually cut them away. By doing this, the blending stump will last longer and will make blending a lot easier on your part.</li>\r\n</ol>\r\n<h2>Blending Stumps Help to Create Smooth Images</h2>\r\nBlending stumps come in handy for larger areas that need to be blended such as backgrounds, prominent facial features, skin tones and so forth. They can also be used in smaller areas that require detail. Blending stumps add a smooth appearance to the image. When you use this tool, make sure that you use it carefully and in a slow motion.\r\n<h2>Homemade Blending Stump</h2>\r\nIf you are in need of a blending stump and do not want to purchase one, then I have included step-by-step instructions on how to easily make one.\r\n<ol>\r\n 	<li>Select the type of paper that you would like to use in order to make the blending stump. Try to find paper that can be rolled easily and not cause you much of a problem.</li>\r\n 	<li>Make sure that you cut the paper down so that the total length goes from the end of your index finger knuckle to the tip. Make sure that you allow the longer side to be intact as this will provide more paper to roll and lead to a better blending stump.</li>\r\n 	<li>If you have decided to use a hard form of paper (writing paper or copy paper), make some small folds and roll it, but if you note that the paper is soft (tissue or toilet paper) just begin by rolling it.</li>\r\n 	<li>When rolling, make sure that it is done tightly. If you roll it too loose, there is a chance of the stump becoming floppy. Do not make this mistake, as you will not be able to get a grip on it.</li>\r\n 	<li>Roll the stump so that you see only one inch that is left to roll. This is the area where you will create the point.</li>\r\n 	<li>Apply glue on the inside of the inch that you left off and also on the rolled part.</li>\r\n 	<li>Use sharp scissors to cut off the end of the stump so that it is smooth.</li>\r\n 	<li>Get a pencil sharpener to sharpen the side that you have cut so that you can get it to a rough point.</li>\r\n 	<li>Your blending stump is ready to use.</li>\r\n</ol>\r\nWhen you apply these methods and techniques, you will become comfortable using a blending stump in no time. I hope you will take the methods and techniques I have taught you for how to use a blending stump and apply them in the creation of your next image. While using this tool, make sure that you take your time and do not rush into the blending process. If you work your way slowing through the process, then you will get a realistic appearing image which the viewers of your artwork will adore.','How to Use a Blending Stump for Realistic Effects','','inherit','closed','closed','','3785-revision-v1','','','2017-10-01 21:23:38','2017-10-02 04:23:38','',3785,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3785-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3809,2,'2017-10-01 21:27:33','2017-10-02 04:27:33','If you are a fan of singer Selena Gomez, then you will enjoy this tutorial! Follow along with the following steps to learn how to draw Selena Gomez.\r\n\r\nWe will use the reference photo seen below.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou will need a piece of paper, a pencil, and inspiration of course. For this tutorial we are using Aquarelle paper, which will provide an interesting portrait due to the paper’s thickness and texture. Thick paper is preferred because it is less possible to be torn apart if you use your eraser a lot.\r\n\r\nWe’re using a 2B pencil for this drawing, but for sketching you can also use an HB, B, or any type of H pencil.\r\n<h2>Use Guidelines to Place Facial Features</h2>\r\nStep 1 - Look at the picture and try to outline the main parts like the face oval, eyes, lips, nose, hairline, etc. It will be helpful to try to measure how many times one part of the face can fit in another on your reference photo and then look if your drawing matches it.\r\n\r\nThis is a well-known method. For example, how many heads fit in the whole adult body? In our case, we might ask how many times the width of the face can fit in its height. The answer would be roughly one and a half times. You can use this method for other parts of the face as well.\r\n\r\nDo not press too hard on your pencil, because in future steps you will need to get rid of some lines.\r\n\r\nStep 2 - Now try to outline the main parts on the inside of the face. Draw rough boxes and guidelines that properly place the eyes, nose, lips, mouth, and hairline. Maybe add a little bit of line to indicate the shoulders as well. You don’t need to worry about them too much for now, since we are primarily concentrating on the face.\r\n\r\nStep 3 - Observe the reference photo and try to draw the eyes, nose, and lips as closely to the original as possible in those spaces you outlined before.\r\n<h2>Basic Face Outline and Highlight Placement</h2>\r\nStep 4 - Erase those extra guidelines. Carefully reshape the remaining lines as needed so the form more closely matches Selena’s features. Add some tiny lines that serve as extra details. Some examples include lines above the eyes to indicate the upper eyelids, the outline of the irises, and some small lines on the nose.\r\n\r\nStep 5 - Look closely at the picture and try to draw, lightly pressing on the pencil, those spots that are the most light and shiny on the face. They will need to stay untouched for most of the time.\r\n\r\nStep 6 - Add some details from the reference photo like the pupils and highlights in the eyes, subtle lines under Selena’s eyes, in the corner of her lips, cheekbone lines, neck and collar lines, etc.\r\n<h2>Shading the Eyes</h2>\r\nStep 7 - Now, let’s get into a little more of the details. We can start with the eyebrows. It is important to remember that eyebrows do not grow randomly. They have their own direction, so try your best to follow it.\r\n\r\nStep 8 - Now let’s draw eyelashes. As said before with the eyebrows, remember that eyelashes follow a certain direction too. From the center of the eye, the direction changes to the opposite one. Now you can press harder on the pencil, since the harder you press, the darker the value will be. Selena’s eyelashes need to be very dark.\r\n\r\nStep 9 - Now start shading the eyes. Add value to the iris of each eye. Also darken the pupils of the eyes, as pupils should be very dark.\r\n\r\nAdditionally, it is slightly darker along the upper part of the whites of the eyes where the upper eyelids cast a shadow below. Do not press too hard on the pencil for this shading.\r\n<h2>Shading the Nose</h2>\r\nStep 10 - Shade Selena’s nose, avoiding the white parts you outlined before. Press lightly on the pencil, and try to make strokes all in the same direction.\r\n\r\nStep 11 - Now layer more shading onto the nose. Try to imitate with strokes the direction and angles of different nose parts.\r\n<h2>Shading the Lips</h2>\r\nStep 12 - Repeat Step 10 but shading the lips.\r\n\r\nStep 13 - Repeat Step 11 but shading the lips. Now you can press harder since lips are darker in value. You can now use pencils like 3B, 4B, 5B and so on. For the example presented in this tutorial, we will use the same pencil (2B) just to show that if you do not have a lot of pencils it is not a problem. Use an eraser to create white shiny parts, imitating lip gloss.\r\n<h2>Shading the Face</h2>\r\nStep 14 - Next, shade Selena’s entire face, avoiding white outlined spots.\r\n\r\nStep 15 - Now it is getting a little trickier. You’ll have to observe with attention the shading on your reference photo and try to put shading on the same spots. Still try not to press too hard on your pencil.\r\n\r\nIf you have a hard time following the shading on a colored reference photograph, just turn it black and white in any photo editing program. It is important also to put a paper handkerchief or a piece of paper under you drawing hand so as to not smudge your already existing shading and create a mess.\r\n\r\nStep 16 - Continue shading on the other side of the face as well. After you are done, try with light strokes to create a gradient passage from shaded parts to those outlined white spots. Doing so will ensure they won’t stand out as much and will seem more realistic.\r\n<h2>Shading the Hair</h2>\r\nStep 17 - Shade the hair, pressing harder on the pencil but not too hard.\r\n\r\nStep 18 - Imitate shades on the reference photograph.\r\n\r\nDo not use straight harsh strokes. Instead use curved strokes that imitate the curvature of hair. You may wish to use another type of pencil, as mentioned in Step 13.\r\n\r\nStep 19 - Finish shading Selena’s hair. Leave some of the lesser dark parts untouched in some places to imitate shiny, healthy hair. Draw loose strands of hair along the outer edges and along the hairline.\r\n<h2>Completing the Portrait</h2>\r\nStep 20 - Shade the rest of the body with light strokes, using the same pencil that was used for the facial skin tones.\r\n\r\nStep 21 - Shade the collarbone and other darker parts, always trying to change stroke direction and inclination according to the reference photo. Add details like moles and use an eraser to pull out highlights as needed.\r\n\r\nLook over your drawing for any necessary fine-tuning or finishing touches. Carefully brush away any residue left behind on your drawing from your eraser.\r\n\r\nAt this point, your drawing should be complete! Hopefully you found this tutorial on how to draw Selena Gomez useful. I trust that you will apply some of the tips from this lesson to some of your future drawings.','How to Draw Selena Gomez','','inherit','closed','closed','','3788-revision-v1','','','2017-10-01 21:27:33','2017-10-02 04:27:33','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3788-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3810,2,'2017-10-01 21:28:29','2017-10-02 04:28:29','','01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline','','inherit','open','closed','','01-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-outline','','','2017-10-01 21:49:32','2017-10-02 04:49:32','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3811,2,'2017-10-01 21:28:32','2017-10-02 04:28:32','','02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan','','inherit','open','closed','','02-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-facial-outline-plan','','','2017-10-01 21:55:12','2017-10-02 04:55:12','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3812,2,'2017-10-01 21:28:35','2017-10-02 04:28:35','','03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline','','inherit','open','closed','','03-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-facial-outline','','','2017-10-01 21:55:34','2017-10-02 04:55:34','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3813,2,'2017-10-01 21:28:38','2017-10-02 04:28:38','','04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch','','inherit','open','closed','','04-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-rough-sketch','','','2017-10-01 21:56:29','2017-10-02 04:56:29','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3814,2,'2017-10-01 21:28:41','2017-10-02 04:28:41','','05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial expression','','inherit','open','closed','','05-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-facial-expression','','','2017-10-01 21:56:45','2017-10-02 04:56:45','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3815,2,'2017-10-01 21:28:44','2017-10-02 04:28:44','','06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes','','inherit','open','closed','','06-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-eyes','','','2017-10-01 21:57:00','2017-10-02 04:57:00','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3816,2,'2017-10-01 21:28:46','2017-10-02 04:28:46','','07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details','','inherit','open','closed','','07-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-details','','','2017-10-01 21:57:19','2017-10-02 04:57:19','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3817,2,'2017-10-01 21:28:49','2017-10-02 04:28:49','','08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left face-outline','','inherit','open','closed','','08-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-left-face-outline','','','2017-10-01 21:58:14','2017-10-02 04:58:14','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3818,2,'2017-10-01 21:28:52','2017-10-02 04:28:52','','8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes','','inherit','open','closed','','8-2-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-eyes','','','2017-10-01 21:59:35','2017-10-02 04:59:35','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3819,2,'2017-10-01 21:28:55','2017-10-02 04:28:55','','09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips outline','','inherit','open','closed','','09-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-lips-outline','','','2017-10-01 22:00:27','2017-10-02 05:00:27','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3820,2,'2017-10-01 21:28:58','2017-10-02 04:28:58','','10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline','','inherit','open','closed','','10-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-nose-outline','','','2017-10-01 22:00:44','2017-10-02 05:00:44','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3821,2,'2017-10-01 21:29:01','2017-10-02 04:29:01','','11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows','','inherit','open','closed','','11-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-eyebrows','','','2017-10-02 04:27:39','2017-10-02 11:27:39','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3822,2,'2017-10-01 21:29:04','2017-10-02 04:29:04','','12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips','','inherit','open','closed','','12-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-lips','','','2017-10-02 04:33:42','2017-10-02 11:33:42','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3823,2,'2017-10-01 21:29:07','2017-10-02 04:29:07','','13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch','','inherit','open','closed','','13-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-lips-final-sketch','','','2017-10-02 04:40:40','2017-10-02 11:40:40','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3824,2,'2017-10-01 21:29:10','2017-10-02 04:29:10','','14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline','','inherit','open','closed','','14-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-head-outline','','','2017-10-02 04:42:47','2017-10-02 11:42:47','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3825,2,'2017-10-01 21:29:13','2017-10-02 04:29:13','','15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch','','inherit','open','closed','','15-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-facial-sketch','','','2017-10-02 04:43:01','2017-10-02 11:43:01','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3826,2,'2017-10-01 21:29:16','2017-10-02 04:29:16','','16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair','','inherit','open','closed','','16-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-hair','','','2017-10-02 04:43:36','2017-10-02 11:43:36','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3827,2,'2017-10-01 21:29:19','2017-10-02 04:29:19','','17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed','','inherit','open','closed','','17-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-ears-and-hair-completed','','','2017-10-02 04:44:38','2017-10-02 11:44:38','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3828,2,'2017-10-01 21:29:21','2017-10-02 04:29:21','','18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks','','inherit','open','closed','','18-2-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-marks','','','2017-10-02 04:48:45','2017-10-02 11:48:45','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3829,2,'2017-10-01 21:29:24','2017-10-02 04:29:24','','18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch','','inherit','open','closed','','18-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-final-left-head-sketch','','','2017-10-02 04:45:07','2017-10-02 11:45:07','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3830,2,'2017-10-01 21:29:27','2017-10-02 04:29:27','','19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage','','inherit','open','closed','','19-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-facial-final-stage','','','2017-10-02 04:52:03','2017-10-02 11:52:03','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3831,2,'2017-10-01 21:29:30','2017-10-02 04:29:30','','20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline','','inherit','open','closed','','20-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-dress-outline','','','2017-10-02 04:52:24','2017-10-02 11:52:24','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3832,2,'2017-10-01 21:29:33','2017-10-02 04:29:33','','21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch','','inherit','open','closed','','21-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-final-sketch','','','2017-10-02 04:52:47','2017-10-02 11:52:47','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3833,2,'2017-10-01 21:29:36','2017-10-02 04:29:36','','22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final','<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/category/well-known-people/\">WELL-KNOWN PEOPLE</a>','inherit','open','closed','','22-how-to-draw-selena-gomez-final','','','2017-10-08 19:25:32','2017-10-09 02:25:32','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3834,2,'2017-10-01 21:30:17','2017-10-02 04:30:17','','ref-selena-gomez','','inherit','open','closed','','ref-selena-gomez','','','2017-10-01 21:45:07','2017-10-02 04:45:07','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3835,2,'2017-10-01 21:31:20','2017-10-02 04:31:20','','01-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','inherit','open','closed','','01-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','','2017-10-02 05:34:08','2017-10-02 12:34:08','',3790,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3836,2,'2017-10-01 21:31:23','2017-10-02 04:31:23','','02-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','inherit','open','closed','','02-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','','2017-10-02 05:34:30','2017-10-02 12:34:30','',3790,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3837,2,'2017-10-01 21:31:33','2017-10-02 04:31:33','','03-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','inherit','open','closed','','03-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','','2017-10-02 05:36:29','2017-10-02 12:36:29','',3790,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3838,2,'2017-10-01 21:31:36','2017-10-02 04:31:36','','04-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','inherit','open','closed','','04-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','','2017-10-02 05:36:52','2017-10-02 12:36:52','',3790,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3839,2,'2017-10-01 21:31:40','2017-10-02 04:31:40','','05-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','inherit','open','closed','','05-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','','2017-10-02 05:37:54','2017-10-02 12:37:54','',3790,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3840,2,'2017-10-01 21:31:43','2017-10-02 04:31:43','','06-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','inherit','open','closed','','06-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','','2017-10-02 05:38:17','2017-10-02 12:38:17','',3790,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3841,2,'2017-10-01 21:31:46','2017-10-02 04:31:46','','07-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','inherit','open','closed','','07-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','','2017-10-02 05:38:36','2017-10-02 12:38:36','',3790,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3842,2,'2017-10-01 21:31:49','2017-10-02 04:31:49','','08-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','inherit','open','closed','','08-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','','2017-10-02 05:39:00','2017-10-02 12:39:00','',3790,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3843,2,'2017-10-01 21:31:52','2017-10-02 04:31:52','','09-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','inherit','open','closed','','09-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','','2017-10-02 05:40:15','2017-10-02 12:40:15','',3790,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3844,2,'2017-10-01 21:31:55','2017-10-02 04:31:55','','10-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','inherit','open','closed','','10-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','','2017-10-02 05:41:00','2017-10-02 12:41:00','',3790,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3845,2,'2017-10-01 21:31:58','2017-10-02 04:31:58','','how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','inherit','open','closed','','how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','','2017-10-02 05:41:27','2017-10-02 12:41:27','',3790,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3846,2,'2017-10-01 21:32:02','2017-10-02 04:32:02','','ref-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','inherit','open','closed','','ref-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings','','','2017-10-02 05:32:55','2017-10-02 12:32:55','',3790,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-how-to-draw-an-ear-with-piercings.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3847,2,'2017-10-01 21:32:05','2017-10-02 04:32:05','','step-materials-how-to-draw-an-ear','','inherit','open','closed','','step-materials-how-to-draw-an-ear','','','2017-10-02 05:33:34','2017-10-02 12:33:34','',3790,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/step-materials-how-to-draw-an-ear.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3848,2,'2017-10-01 21:34:40','2017-10-02 04:34:40','','01-how-to-draw-a-guy-head','','inherit','open','closed','','01-how-to-draw-a-guy-head','','','2017-10-03 05:26:48','2017-10-03 12:26:48','',3795,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-how-to-draw-a-guy-head.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3849,2,'2017-10-01 21:34:44','2017-10-02 04:34:44','','02-how-to-draw-a-guy-ears-neck-shoulders','','inherit','open','closed','','02-how-to-draw-a-guy-ears-neck-shoulders','','','2017-10-03 05:28:02','2017-10-03 12:28:02','',3795,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-how-to-draw-a-guy-ears-neck-shoulders.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3850,2,'2017-10-01 21:34:47','2017-10-02 04:34:47','','03-how-to-draw-a-guy-arms-and-hands','','inherit','open','closed','','03-how-to-draw-a-guy-arms-and-hands','','','2017-10-03 05:28:27','2017-10-03 12:28:27','',3795,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-how-to-draw-a-guy-arms-and-hands.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3851,2,'2017-10-01 21:34:50','2017-10-02 04:34:50','','04-how-to-draw-a-guy-hair-eyes-nose','','inherit','open','closed','','04-how-to-draw-a-guy-hair-eyes-nose','','','2017-10-03 05:28:41','2017-10-03 12:28:41','',3795,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-how-to-draw-a-guy-hair-eyes-nose.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3852,2,'2017-10-01 21:34:53','2017-10-02 04:34:53','','05-how-to-draw-a-guy-fingers-eyes-ears','','inherit','open','closed','','05-how-to-draw-a-guy-fingers-eyes-ears','','','2017-10-03 05:28:52','2017-10-03 12:28:52','',3795,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-how-to-draw-a-guy-fingers-eyes-ears.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3853,2,'2017-10-01 21:34:56','2017-10-02 04:34:56','','06-how-to-draw-a-guy-hair-shadow-eyes','','inherit','open','closed','','06-how-to-draw-a-guy-hair-shadow-eyes','','','2017-10-03 05:29:04','2017-10-03 12:29:04','',3795,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-how-to-draw-a-guy-hair-shadow-eyes.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3854,2,'2017-10-01 21:34:59','2017-10-02 04:34:59','','07-how-to-draw-a-guy-shadows-and-dark-places','','inherit','open','closed','','07-how-to-draw-a-guy-shadows-and-dark-places','','','2017-10-03 05:29:14','2017-10-03 12:29:14','',3795,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-how-to-draw-a-guy-shadows-and-dark-places.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3855,2,'2017-10-01 21:35:02','2017-10-02 04:35:02','','08-how-to-draw-a-guy-highlights','','inherit','open','closed','','08-how-to-draw-a-guy-highlights','','','2017-10-03 05:29:26','2017-10-03 12:29:26','',3795,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-how-to-draw-a-guy-highlights.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3856,2,'2017-10-01 21:35:05','2017-10-02 04:35:05','','09-how-to-draw-a-guy-shirt','','inherit','open','closed','','09-how-to-draw-a-guy-shirt','','','2017-10-03 05:29:38','2017-10-03 12:29:38','',3795,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-how-to-draw-a-guy-shirt.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3857,2,'2017-10-01 21:35:08','2017-10-02 04:35:08','','10-how-to-draw-a-guy-more-shade','','inherit','open','closed','','10-how-to-draw-a-guy-more-shade','','','2017-10-03 05:29:50','2017-10-03 12:29:50','',3795,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-how-to-draw-a-guy-more-shade.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3858,2,'2017-10-01 21:35:11','2017-10-02 04:35:11','','11-how-to-draw-a-guy-darker-shadow-and-outlines','','inherit','open','closed','','11-how-to-draw-a-guy-darker-shadow-and-outlines','','','2017-10-03 05:29:59','2017-10-03 12:29:59','',3795,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-how-to-draw-a-guy-darker-shadow-and-outlines.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3859,2,'2017-10-01 21:35:14','2017-10-02 04:35:14','','12-how-to-draw-a-guy-shadows-and-highlights','','inherit','open','closed','','12-how-to-draw-a-guy-shadows-and-highlights','','','2017-10-03 05:30:09','2017-10-03 12:30:09','',3795,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-how-to-draw-a-guy-shadows-and-highlights.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3860,2,'2017-10-01 21:35:17','2017-10-02 04:35:17','','13-how-to-draw-a-guy-shade-and-erase','','inherit','open','closed','','13-how-to-draw-a-guy-shade-and-erase','','','2017-10-03 05:30:56','2017-10-03 12:30:56','',3795,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-how-to-draw-a-guy-shade-and-erase.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3861,2,'2017-10-01 21:35:21','2017-10-02 04:35:21','','14-how-to-draw-a-guy-scared','','inherit','open','closed','','14-how-to-draw-a-guy-scared','','','2017-10-03 05:31:06','2017-10-03 12:31:06','',3795,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-how-to-draw-a-guy-scared.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3862,2,'2017-10-01 21:35:24','2017-10-02 04:35:24','','learn-how-to-draw-a-guy-scared-out-of-his-mind','','inherit','open','closed','','learn-how-to-draw-a-guy-scared-out-of-his-mind','','','2017-10-03 05:26:31','2017-10-03 12:26:31','',3795,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/learn-how-to-draw-a-guy-scared-out-of-his-mind.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3863,2,'2017-10-01 21:38:23','2017-10-02 04:38:23','','01-how-to-draw-a-guy-rectangles','','inherit','open','closed','','01-how-to-draw-a-guy-rectangles','','','2017-10-05 05:38:59','2017-10-05 12:38:59','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-how-to-draw-a-guy-rectangles.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3864,2,'2017-10-01 21:38:26','2017-10-02 04:38:26','','02-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-and-face-guidelines','','inherit','open','closed','','02-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-and-face-guidelines','','','2017-10-01 21:38:26','2017-10-02 04:38:26','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-how-to-draw-a-guy-head-and-face-guidelines.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3865,2,'2017-10-01 21:38:29','2017-10-02 04:38:29','','03-how-to-draw-a-guy-eyes-and-nose','','inherit','open','closed','','03-how-to-draw-a-guy-eyes-and-nose','','','2017-10-01 21:38:29','2017-10-02 04:38:29','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-how-to-draw-a-guy-eyes-and-nose.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3866,2,'2017-10-01 21:38:32','2017-10-02 04:38:32','','04-how-to-draw-a-guy-mouth','','inherit','open','closed','','04-how-to-draw-a-guy-mouth','','','2017-10-05 05:40:11','2017-10-05 12:40:11','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-how-to-draw-a-guy-mouth.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3867,2,'2017-10-01 21:38:35','2017-10-02 04:38:35','','05-how-to-draw-a-guy-face-outline-eyebrows-ear','','inherit','open','closed','','05-how-to-draw-a-guy-face-outline-eyebrows-ear','','','2017-10-05 05:40:42','2017-10-05 12:40:42','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-how-to-draw-a-guy-face-outline-eyebrows-ear.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3868,2,'2017-10-01 21:38:38','2017-10-02 04:38:38','','06-how-to-draw-a-guy-hair-outline','','inherit','open','closed','','06-how-to-draw-a-guy-hair-outline','','','2017-10-05 05:40:54','2017-10-05 12:40:54','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-how-to-draw-a-guy-hair-outline.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3869,2,'2017-10-01 21:38:41','2017-10-02 04:38:41','','07-how-to-draw-a-guy-face-and-hair-details','','inherit','open','closed','','07-how-to-draw-a-guy-face-and-hair-details','','','2017-10-05 05:41:06','2017-10-05 12:41:06','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-how-to-draw-a-guy-face-and-hair-details.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3870,2,'2017-10-01 21:38:44','2017-10-02 04:38:44','','08-how-to-draw-a-guy-pupils-and-eyelashes','','inherit','open','closed','','08-how-to-draw-a-guy-pupils-and-eyelashes','','','2017-10-05 05:41:18','2017-10-05 12:41:18','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-how-to-draw-a-guy-pupils-and-eyelashes.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3871,2,'2017-10-01 21:38:47','2017-10-02 04:38:47','','09-how-to-draw-a-guy-shoulder-and-neckline','','inherit','open','closed','','09-how-to-draw-a-guy-shoulder-and-neckline','','','2017-10-05 05:41:31','2017-10-05 12:41:31','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-how-to-draw-a-guy-shoulder-and-neckline.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3872,2,'2017-10-01 21:38:50','2017-10-02 04:38:50','','10-how-to-draw-a-guy-seams-and-folds','','inherit','open','closed','','10-how-to-draw-a-guy-seams-and-folds','','','2017-10-05 05:41:47','2017-10-05 12:41:47','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-how-to-draw-a-guy-seams-and-folds.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3873,2,'2017-10-01 21:38:53','2017-10-02 04:38:53','','11-how-to-draw-a-guy-arm-and-hand-basic-shape','','inherit','open','closed','','11-how-to-draw-a-guy-arm-and-hand-basic-shape','','','2017-10-05 05:41:59','2017-10-05 12:41:59','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-how-to-draw-a-guy-arm-and-hand-basic-shape.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3874,2,'2017-10-01 21:38:56','2017-10-02 04:38:56','','12-how-to-draw-a-guy-handle-and-roller-cover','','inherit','open','closed','','12-how-to-draw-a-guy-handle-and-roller-cover','','','2017-10-05 05:42:08','2017-10-05 12:42:08','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-how-to-draw-a-guy-handle-and-roller-cover.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3875,2,'2017-10-01 21:38:59','2017-10-02 04:38:59','','13-how-to-draw-a-guy-paint-roller','','inherit','open','closed','','13-how-to-draw-a-guy-paint-roller','','','2017-10-05 05:42:22','2017-10-05 12:42:22','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-how-to-draw-a-guy-paint-roller.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3876,2,'2017-10-01 21:39:02','2017-10-02 04:39:02','','14-how-to-draw-a-guy-hand','','inherit','open','closed','','14-how-to-draw-a-guy-hand','','','2017-10-05 05:42:33','2017-10-05 12:42:33','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-how-to-draw-a-guy-hand.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3877,2,'2017-10-01 21:39:04','2017-10-02 04:39:04','','15-how-to-draw-a-guy-arm-and-sleeve','','inherit','open','closed','','15-how-to-draw-a-guy-arm-and-sleeve','','','2017-10-05 05:42:44','2017-10-05 12:42:44','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-how-to-draw-a-guy-arm-and-sleeve.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3878,2,'2017-10-01 21:39:07','2017-10-02 04:39:07','','16-how-to-draw-a-guy-erase-guidelines','','inherit','open','closed','','16-how-to-draw-a-guy-erase-guidelines','','','2017-10-05 05:42:56','2017-10-05 12:42:56','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-how-to-draw-a-guy-erase-guidelines.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3879,2,'2017-10-01 21:39:10','2017-10-02 04:39:10','','17-how-to-draw-a-guy-seam-details-and-shadow','','inherit','open','closed','','17-how-to-draw-a-guy-seam-details-and-shadow','','','2017-10-05 05:43:09','2017-10-05 12:43:09','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-how-to-draw-a-guy-seam-details-and-shadow.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3880,2,'2017-10-01 21:39:13','2017-10-02 04:39:13','','18-how-to-draw-a-guy-paint-on-wall','','inherit','open','closed','','18-how-to-draw-a-guy-paint-on-wall','','','2017-10-05 05:43:22','2017-10-05 12:43:22','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-how-to-draw-a-guy-paint-on-wall.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3881,2,'2017-10-01 21:39:16','2017-10-02 04:39:16','','19-how-to-draw-a-guy-darker-tones','','inherit','open','closed','','19-how-to-draw-a-guy-darker-tones','','','2017-10-05 05:43:35','2017-10-05 12:43:35','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-how-to-draw-a-guy-darker-tones.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3882,2,'2017-10-01 21:39:19','2017-10-02 04:39:19','','20-how-to-draw-a-guy-hatch-crosshatch','','inherit','open','closed','','20-how-to-draw-a-guy-hatch-crosshatch','','','2017-10-05 05:43:53','2017-10-05 12:43:53','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-how-to-draw-a-guy-hatch-crosshatch.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3883,2,'2017-10-01 21:39:22','2017-10-02 04:39:22','','final scan how-to-draw-a-guy-painting-the-wall','','inherit','open','closed','','final-scan-how-to-draw-a-guy-painting-the-wall','','','2017-10-05 05:44:29','2017-10-05 12:44:29','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/final-scan-how-to-draw-a-guy-painting-the-wall.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3884,2,'2017-10-01 21:39:24','2017-10-02 04:39:24','','reference-photo-how-to-draw-a-guy-painting-the-wall','','inherit','open','closed','','reference-photo-how-to-draw-a-guy-painting-the-wall','','','2017-10-05 05:39:29','2017-10-05 12:39:29','',3797,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/reference-photo-how-to-draw-a-guy-painting-the-wall.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3885,2,'2017-10-01 21:40:37','2017-10-02 04:40:37','','01-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','01-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 05:54:45','2017-10-06 12:54:45','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3886,2,'2017-10-01 21:40:40','2017-10-02 04:40:40','','02-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','02-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 05:54:57','2017-10-06 12:54:57','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3887,2,'2017-10-01 21:40:42','2017-10-02 04:40:42','','03-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','03-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 05:55:18','2017-10-06 12:55:18','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3888,2,'2017-10-01 21:40:45','2017-10-02 04:40:45','','04-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','04-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 05:55:30','2017-10-06 12:55:30','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3889,2,'2017-10-01 21:40:48','2017-10-02 04:40:48','','05-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','05-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 05:55:47','2017-10-06 12:55:47','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3890,2,'2017-10-01 21:40:51','2017-10-02 04:40:51','','06-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','06-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 05:56:01','2017-10-06 12:56:01','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3891,2,'2017-10-01 21:40:53','2017-10-02 04:40:53','','07-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','07-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 05:56:41','2017-10-06 12:56:41','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3892,2,'2017-10-01 21:40:56','2017-10-02 04:40:56','','08-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','08-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 05:56:53','2017-10-06 12:56:53','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3893,2,'2017-10-01 21:40:59','2017-10-02 04:40:59','','09-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','09-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 05:57:19','2017-10-06 12:57:19','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3894,2,'2017-10-01 21:41:02','2017-10-02 04:41:02','','10-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','10-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 05:57:35','2017-10-06 12:57:35','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3895,2,'2017-10-01 21:41:04','2017-10-02 04:41:04','','11-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','11-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 05:57:46','2017-10-06 12:57:46','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3896,2,'2017-10-01 21:41:07','2017-10-02 04:41:07','','12-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','12-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 05:57:57','2017-10-06 12:57:57','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3897,2,'2017-10-01 21:41:10','2017-10-02 04:41:10','','13-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','13-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 05:58:11','2017-10-06 12:58:11','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3898,2,'2017-10-01 21:41:12','2017-10-02 04:41:12','','14-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','14-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 05:58:29','2017-10-06 12:58:29','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3899,2,'2017-10-01 21:41:15','2017-10-02 04:41:15','','15-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','15-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 05:58:40','2017-10-06 12:58:40','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3900,2,'2017-10-01 21:41:18','2017-10-02 04:41:18','','16-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','16-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 05:58:52','2017-10-06 12:58:52','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3901,2,'2017-10-01 21:41:21','2017-10-02 04:41:21','','17-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','17-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 06:02:16','2017-10-06 13:02:16','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3902,2,'2017-10-01 21:41:24','2017-10-02 04:41:24','','18-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','18-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 06:02:28','2017-10-06 13:02:28','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3903,2,'2017-10-01 21:41:26','2017-10-02 04:41:26','','19-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','19-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 06:02:38','2017-10-06 13:02:38','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3904,2,'2017-10-01 21:41:29','2017-10-02 04:41:29','','20-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','20-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 06:02:56','2017-10-06 13:02:56','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3905,2,'2017-10-01 21:41:31','2017-10-02 04:41:31','','21-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','21-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 06:03:49','2017-10-06 13:03:49','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3906,2,'2017-10-01 21:41:34','2017-10-02 04:41:34','','22-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','22-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 06:04:00','2017-10-06 13:04:00','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3907,2,'2017-10-01 21:41:37','2017-10-02 04:41:37','','23-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','23-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 06:04:34','2017-10-06 13:04:34','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/23-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3908,2,'2017-10-01 21:41:48','2017-10-02 04:41:48','','24-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','24-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 06:04:46','2017-10-06 13:04:46','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/24-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3909,2,'2017-10-01 21:41:51','2017-10-02 04:41:51','','25-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','25-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 06:04:59','2017-10-06 13:04:59','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/25-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3910,2,'2017-10-01 21:41:53','2017-10-02 04:41:53','','reference-photo-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','inherit','open','closed','','reference-photo-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar','','','2017-10-06 05:54:16','2017-10-06 12:54:16','',3799,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/reference-photo-how-to-draw-a-lady-eating-a-breakfast-bar.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3911,2,'2017-10-01 21:45:21','2017-10-02 04:45:21','If you are a fan of singer Selena Gomez, then you will enjoy this tutorial! Follow along with the following steps to learn how to draw Selena Gomez.\r\n\r\nWe will use the reference photo seen below.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3834\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"670\" height=\"1000\" /></a>\r\n\r\nYou will need a piece of paper, a pencil, and inspiration of course. For this tutorial we are using Aquarelle paper, which will provide an interesting portrait due to the paper’s thickness and texture. Thick paper is preferred because it is less possible to be torn apart if you use your eraser a lot.\r\n\r\nWe’re using a 2B pencil for this drawing, but for sketching you can also use an HB, B, or any type of H pencil.\r\n<h2>Use Guidelines to Place Facial Features</h2>\r\nStep 1 - Look at the picture and try to outline the main parts like the face oval, eyes, lips, nose, hairline, etc. It will be helpful to try to measure how many times one part of the face can fit in another on your reference photo and then look if your drawing matches it.\r\n\r\nThis is a well-known method. For example, how many heads fit in the whole adult body? In our case, we might ask how many times the width of the face can fit in its height. The answer would be roughly one and a half times. You can use this method for other parts of the face as well.\r\n\r\nDo not press too hard on your pencil, because in future steps you will need to get rid of some lines.\r\n\r\nStep 2 - Now try to outline the main parts on the inside of the face. Draw rough boxes and guidelines that properly place the eyes, nose, lips, mouth, and hairline. Maybe add a little bit of line to indicate the shoulders as well. You don’t need to worry about them too much for now, since we are primarily concentrating on the face.\r\n\r\nStep 3 - Observe the reference photo and try to draw the eyes, nose, and lips as closely to the original as possible in those spaces you outlined before.\r\n<h2>Basic Face Outline and Highlight Placement</h2>\r\nStep 4 - Erase those extra guidelines. Carefully reshape the remaining lines as needed so the form more closely matches Selena’s features. Add some tiny lines that serve as extra details. Some examples include lines above the eyes to indicate the upper eyelids, the outline of the irises, and some small lines on the nose.\r\n\r\nStep 5 - Look closely at the picture and try to draw, lightly pressing on the pencil, those spots that are the most light and shiny on the face. They will need to stay untouched for most of the time.\r\n\r\nStep 6 - Add some details from the reference photo like the pupils and highlights in the eyes, subtle lines under Selena’s eyes, in the corner of her lips, cheekbone lines, neck and collar lines, etc.\r\n<h2>Shading the Eyes</h2>\r\nStep 7 - Now, let’s get into a little more of the details. We can start with the eyebrows. It is important to remember that eyebrows do not grow randomly. They have their own direction, so try your best to follow it.\r\n\r\nStep 8 - Now let’s draw eyelashes. As said before with the eyebrows, remember that eyelashes follow a certain direction too. From the center of the eye, the direction changes to the opposite one. Now you can press harder on the pencil, since the harder you press, the darker the value will be. Selena’s eyelashes need to be very dark.\r\n\r\nStep 9 - Now start shading the eyes. Add value to the iris of each eye. Also darken the pupils of the eyes, as pupils should be very dark.\r\n\r\nAdditionally, it is slightly darker along the upper part of the whites of the eyes where the upper eyelids cast a shadow below. Do not press too hard on the pencil for this shading.\r\n<h2>Shading the Nose</h2>\r\nStep 10 - Shade Selena’s nose, avoiding the white parts you outlined before. Press lightly on the pencil, and try to make strokes all in the same direction.\r\n\r\nStep 11 - Now layer more shading onto the nose. Try to imitate with strokes the direction and angles of different nose parts.\r\n<h2>Shading the Lips</h2>\r\nStep 12 - Repeat Step 10 but shading the lips.\r\n\r\nStep 13 - Repeat Step 11 but shading the lips. Now you can press harder since lips are darker in value. You can now use pencils like 3B, 4B, 5B and so on. For the example presented in this tutorial, we will use the same pencil (2B) just to show that if you do not have a lot of pencils it is not a problem. Use an eraser to create white shiny parts, imitating lip gloss.\r\n<h2>Shading the Face</h2>\r\nStep 14 - Next, shade Selena’s entire face, avoiding white outlined spots.\r\n\r\nStep 15 - Now it is getting a little trickier. You’ll have to observe with attention the shading on your reference photo and try to put shading on the same spots. Still try not to press too hard on your pencil.\r\n\r\nIf you have a hard time following the shading on a colored reference photograph, just turn it black and white in any photo editing program. It is important also to put a paper handkerchief or a piece of paper under you drawing hand so as to not smudge your already existing shading and create a mess.\r\n\r\nStep 16 - Continue shading on the other side of the face as well. After you are done, try with light strokes to create a gradient passage from shaded parts to those outlined white spots. Doing so will ensure they won’t stand out as much and will seem more realistic.\r\n<h2>Shading the Hair</h2>\r\nStep 17 - Shade the hair, pressing harder on the pencil but not too hard.\r\n\r\nStep 18 - Imitate shades on the reference photograph.\r\n\r\nDo not use straight harsh strokes. Instead use curved strokes that imitate the curvature of hair. You may wish to use another type of pencil, as mentioned in Step 13.\r\n\r\nStep 19 - Finish shading Selena’s hair. Leave some of the lesser dark parts untouched in some places to imitate shiny, healthy hair. Draw loose strands of hair along the outer edges and along the hairline.\r\n<h2>Completing the Portrait</h2>\r\nStep 20 - Shade the rest of the body with light strokes, using the same pencil that was used for the facial skin tones.\r\n\r\nStep 21 - Shade the collarbone and other darker parts, always trying to change stroke direction and inclination according to the reference photo. Add details like moles and use an eraser to pull out highlights as needed.\r\n\r\nLook over your drawing for any necessary fine-tuning or finishing touches. Carefully brush away any residue left behind on your drawing from your eraser.\r\n\r\nAt this point, your drawing should be complete! Hopefully you found this tutorial on how to draw Selena Gomez useful. I trust that you will apply some of the tips from this lesson to some of your future drawings.','How to Draw Selena Gomez','','inherit','closed','closed','','3788-revision-v1','','','2017-10-01 21:45:21','2017-10-02 04:45:21','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3788-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3912,2,'2017-10-01 21:48:09','2017-10-02 04:48:09','If you are a fan of singer Selena Gomez, then you will enjoy this tutorial! Follow along with the following steps to learn how to draw Selena Gomez.\r\n\r\nWe will use the reference photo seen below.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3834 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez-402x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"402\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nYou will need a piece of paper, a pencil, and inspiration of course. For this tutorial we are using Aquarelle paper, which will provide an interesting portrait due to the paper’s thickness and texture. Thick paper is preferred because it is less possible to be torn apart if you use your eraser a lot.\r\n\r\nWe’re using a 2B pencil for this drawing, but for sketching you can also use an HB, B, or any type of H pencil.\r\n<h2>Use Guidelines to Place Facial Features</h2>\r\nStep 1 - Look at the picture and try to outline the main parts like the face oval, eyes, lips, nose, hairline, etc. It will be helpful to try to measure how many times one part of the face can fit in another on your reference photo and then look if your drawing matches it.\r\n\r\nThis is a well-known method. For example, how many heads fit in the whole adult body? In our case, we might ask how many times the width of the face can fit in its height. The answer would be roughly one and a half times. You can use this method for other parts of the face as well.\r\n\r\nDo not press too hard on your pencil, because in future steps you will need to get rid of some lines.\r\n\r\nStep 2 - Now try to outline the main parts on the inside of the face. Draw rough boxes and guidelines that properly place the eyes, nose, lips, mouth, and hairline. Maybe add a little bit of line to indicate the shoulders as well. You don’t need to worry about them too much for now, since we are primarily concentrating on the face.\r\n\r\nStep 3 - Observe the reference photo and try to draw the eyes, nose, and lips as closely to the original as possible in those spaces you outlined before.\r\n<h2>Basic Face Outline and Highlight Placement</h2>\r\nStep 4 - Erase those extra guidelines. Carefully reshape the remaining lines as needed so the form more closely matches Selena’s features. Add some tiny lines that serve as extra details. Some examples include lines above the eyes to indicate the upper eyelids, the outline of the irises, and some small lines on the nose.\r\n\r\nStep 5 - Look closely at the picture and try to draw, lightly pressing on the pencil, those spots that are the most light and shiny on the face. They will need to stay untouched for most of the time.\r\n\r\nStep 6 - Add some details from the reference photo like the pupils and highlights in the eyes, subtle lines under Selena’s eyes, in the corner of her lips, cheekbone lines, neck and collar lines, etc.\r\n<h2>Shading the Eyes</h2>\r\nStep 7 - Now, let’s get into a little more of the details. We can start with the eyebrows. It is important to remember that eyebrows do not grow randomly. They have their own direction, so try your best to follow it.\r\n\r\nStep 8 - Now let’s draw eyelashes. As said before with the eyebrows, remember that eyelashes follow a certain direction too. From the center of the eye, the direction changes to the opposite one. Now you can press harder on the pencil, since the harder you press, the darker the value will be. Selena’s eyelashes need to be very dark.\r\n\r\nStep 9 - Now start shading the eyes. Add value to the iris of each eye. Also darken the pupils of the eyes, as pupils should be very dark.\r\n\r\nAdditionally, it is slightly darker along the upper part of the whites of the eyes where the upper eyelids cast a shadow below. Do not press too hard on the pencil for this shading.\r\n<h2>Shading the Nose</h2>\r\nStep 10 - Shade Selena’s nose, avoiding the white parts you outlined before. Press lightly on the pencil, and try to make strokes all in the same direction.\r\n\r\nStep 11 - Now layer more shading onto the nose. Try to imitate with strokes the direction and angles of different nose parts.\r\n<h2>Shading the Lips</h2>\r\nStep 12 - Repeat Step 10 but shading the lips.\r\n\r\nStep 13 - Repeat Step 11 but shading the lips. Now you can press harder since lips are darker in value. You can now use pencils like 3B, 4B, 5B and so on. For the example presented in this tutorial, we will use the same pencil (2B) just to show that if you do not have a lot of pencils it is not a problem. Use an eraser to create white shiny parts, imitating lip gloss.\r\n<h2>Shading the Face</h2>\r\nStep 14 - Next, shade Selena’s entire face, avoiding white outlined spots.\r\n\r\nStep 15 - Now it is getting a little trickier. You’ll have to observe with attention the shading on your reference photo and try to put shading on the same spots. Still try not to press too hard on your pencil.\r\n\r\nIf you have a hard time following the shading on a colored reference photograph, just turn it black and white in any photo editing program. It is important also to put a paper handkerchief or a piece of paper under you drawing hand so as to not smudge your already existing shading and create a mess.\r\n\r\nStep 16 - Continue shading on the other side of the face as well. After you are done, try with light strokes to create a gradient passage from shaded parts to those outlined white spots. Doing so will ensure they won’t stand out as much and will seem more realistic.\r\n<h2>Shading the Hair</h2>\r\nStep 17 - Shade the hair, pressing harder on the pencil but not too hard.\r\n\r\nStep 18 - Imitate shades on the reference photograph.\r\n\r\nDo not use straight harsh strokes. Instead use curved strokes that imitate the curvature of hair. You may wish to use another type of pencil, as mentioned in Step 13.\r\n\r\nStep 19 - Finish shading Selena’s hair. Leave some of the lesser dark parts untouched in some places to imitate shiny, healthy hair. Draw loose strands of hair along the outer edges and along the hairline.\r\n<h2>Completing the Portrait</h2>\r\nStep 20 - Shade the rest of the body with light strokes, using the same pencil that was used for the facial skin tones.\r\n\r\nStep 21 - Shade the collarbone and other darker parts, always trying to change stroke direction and inclination according to the reference photo. Add details like moles and use an eraser to pull out highlights as needed.\r\n\r\nLook over your drawing for any necessary fine-tuning or finishing touches. Carefully brush away any residue left behind on your drawing from your eraser.\r\n\r\nAt this point, your drawing should be complete! Hopefully you found this tutorial on how to draw Selena Gomez useful. I trust that you will apply some of the tips from this lesson to some of your future drawings.','How to Draw Selena Gomez','','inherit','closed','closed','','3788-revision-v1','','','2017-10-01 21:48:09','2017-10-02 04:48:09','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3788-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3913,2,'2017-10-01 22:01:44','2017-10-02 05:01:44','If you are a fan of singer Selena Gomez, then you will enjoy this tutorial! Follow along with the following steps to learn how to draw Selena Gomez.\r\n\r\nWe will use the reference photo seen below.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3834 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez-402x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"402\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nYou will need a piece of paper, a pencil, and inspiration of course. For this tutorial we are using Aquarelle paper, which will provide an interesting portrait due to the paper’s thickness and texture. Thick paper is preferred because it is less possible to be torn apart if you use your eraser a lot.\r\n\r\nWe’re using a 2B pencil for this drawing, but for sketching you can also use an HB, B, or any type of H pencil.\r\n<h2>Use Guidelines to Place Facial Features</h2>\r\nStep 1 - Look at the picture and try to outline the main parts like the face oval, eyes, lips, nose, hairline, etc. It will be helpful to try to measure how many times one part of the face can fit in another on your reference photo and then look if your drawing matches it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3810\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline-454x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"454\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThis is a well-known method. For example, how many heads fit in the whole adult body? In our case, we might ask how many times the width of the face can fit in its height. The answer would be roughly one and a half times. You can use this method for other parts of the face as well.\r\n\r\nDo not press too hard on your pencil, because in future steps you will need to get rid of some lines.\r\n\r\nStep 2 - Now try to outline the main parts on the inside of the face. Draw rough boxes and guidelines that properly place the eyes, nose, lips, mouth, and hairline. Maybe add a little bit of line to indicate the shoulders as well. You don’t need to worry about them too much for now, since we are primarily concentrating on the face.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3811\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 3 - Observe the reference photo and try to draw the eyes, nose, and lips as closely to the original as possible in those spaces you outlined before.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3812\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Basic Face Outline and Highlight Placement</h2>\r\nStep 4 - Erase those extra guidelines. Carefully reshape the remaining lines as needed so the form more closely matches Selena’s features. Add some tiny lines that serve as extra details. Some examples include lines above the eyes to indicate the upper eyelids, the outline of the irises, and some small lines on the nose.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3813\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 5 - Look closely at the picture and try to draw, lightly pressing on the pencil, those spots that are the most light and shiny on the face. They will need to stay untouched for most of the time.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3814\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 6 - Add some details from the reference photo like the pupils and highlights in the eyes, subtle lines under Selena’s eyes, in the corner of her lips, cheekbone lines, neck and collar lines, etc.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3815\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-457x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"457\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Eyes</h2>\r\nStep 7 - Now, let’s get into a little more of the details. We can start with the eyebrows. It is important to remember that eyebrows do not grow randomly. They have their own direction, so try your best to follow it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3816\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 8 - Now let’s draw eyelashes. As said before with the eyebrows, remember that eyelashes follow a certain direction too. From the center of the eye, the direction changes to the opposite one. Now you can press harder on the pencil, since the harder you press, the darker the value will be. Selena’s eyelashes need to be very dark.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3817\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3818\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 9 - Now start shading the eyes. Add value to the iris of each eye. Also darken the pupils of the eyes, as pupils should be very dark.\r\n\r\nAdditionally, it is slightly darker along the upper part of the whites of the eyes where the upper eyelids cast a shadow below. Do not press too hard on the pencil for this shading.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3819\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Nose</h2>\r\nStep 10 - Shade Selena’s nose, avoiding the white parts you outlined before. Press lightly on the pencil, and try to make strokes all in the same direction.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3820\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 11 - Now layer more shading onto the nose. Try to imitate with strokes the direction and angles of different nose parts.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Shading the Lips</h2>\r\nStep 12 - Repeat Step 10 but shading the lips.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 13 - Repeat Step 11 but shading the lips. Now you can press harder since lips are darker in value. You can now use pencils like 3B, 4B, 5B and so on. For the example presented in this tutorial, we will use the same pencil (2B) just to show that if you do not have a lot of pencils it is not a problem. Use an eraser to create white shiny parts, imitating lip gloss.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Shading the Face</h2>\r\nStep 14 - Next, shade Selena’s entire face, avoiding white outlined spots.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 15 - Now it is getting a little trickier. You’ll have to observe with attention the shading on your reference photo and try to put shading on the same spots. Still try not to press too hard on your pencil.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nIf you have a hard time following the shading on a colored reference photograph, just turn it black and white in any photo editing program. It is important also to put a paper handkerchief or a piece of paper under you drawing hand so as to not smudge your already existing shading and create a mess.\r\n\r\nStep 16 - Continue shading on the other side of the face as well. After you are done, try with light strokes to create a gradient passage from shaded parts to those outlined white spots. Doing so will ensure they won’t stand out as much and will seem more realistic.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Shading the Hair</h2>\r\nStep 17 - Shade the hair, pressing harder on the pencil but not too hard.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 18 - Imitate shades on the reference photograph.\r\n\r\nDo not use straight harsh strokes. Instead use curved strokes that imitate the curvature of hair. You may wish to use another type of pencil, as mentioned in Step 13.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 19 - Finish shading Selena’s hair. Leave some of the lesser dark parts untouched in some places to imitate shiny, healthy hair. Draw loose strands of hair along the outer edges and along the hairline.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Completing the Portrait</h2>\r\nStep 20 - Shade the rest of the body with light strokes, using the same pencil that was used for the facial skin tones.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 21 - Shade the collarbone and other darker parts, always trying to change stroke direction and inclination according to the reference photo. Add details like moles and use an eraser to pull out highlights as needed.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nLook over your drawing for any necessary fine-tuning or finishing touches. Carefully brush away any residue left behind on your drawing from your eraser.\r\n\r\nAt this point, your drawing should be complete! Hopefully you found this tutorial on how to draw Selena Gomez useful. I trust that you will apply some of the tips from this lesson to some of your future drawings.','How to Draw Selena Gomez','','inherit','closed','closed','','3788-revision-v1','','','2017-10-01 22:01:44','2017-10-02 05:01:44','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3788-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3914,2,'2017-10-02 04:54:41','2017-10-02 11:54:41','If you are a fan of singer Selena Gomez, then you will enjoy this tutorial! Follow along with the following steps to learn how to draw Selena Gomez.\r\n\r\nWe will use the reference photo seen below.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3834 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez-402x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"402\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nYou will need a piece of paper, a pencil, and inspiration of course. For this tutorial we are using Aquarelle paper, which will provide an interesting portrait due to the paper’s thickness and texture. Thick paper is preferred because it is less possible to be torn apart if you use your eraser a lot.\r\n\r\nWe’re using a 2B pencil for this drawing, but for sketching you can also use an HB, B, or any type of H pencil.\r\n<h2>Use Guidelines to Place Facial Features</h2>\r\nStep 1 - Look at the picture and try to outline the main parts like the face oval, eyes, lips, nose, hairline, etc. It will be helpful to try to measure how many times one part of the face can fit in another on your reference photo and then look if your drawing matches it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3810\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline-454x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"454\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThis is a well-known method. For example, how many heads fit in the whole adult body? In our case, we might ask how many times the width of the face can fit in its height. The answer would be roughly one and a half times. You can use this method for other parts of the face as well.\r\n\r\nDo not press too hard on your pencil, because in future steps you will need to get rid of some lines.\r\n\r\nStep 2 - Now try to outline the main parts on the inside of the face. Draw rough boxes and guidelines that properly place the eyes, nose, lips, mouth, and hairline. Maybe add a little bit of line to indicate the shoulders as well. You don’t need to worry about them too much for now, since we are primarily concentrating on the face.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3811\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 3 - Observe the reference photo and try to draw the eyes, nose, and lips as closely to the original as possible in those spaces you outlined before.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3812\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Basic Face Outline and Highlight Placement</h2>\r\nStep 4 - Erase those extra guidelines. Carefully reshape the remaining lines as needed so the form more closely matches Selena’s features. Add some tiny lines that serve as extra details. Some examples include lines above the eyes to indicate the upper eyelids, the outline of the irises, and some small lines on the nose.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3813\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 5 - Look closely at the picture and try to draw, lightly pressing on the pencil, those spots that are the most light and shiny on the face. They will need to stay untouched for most of the time.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3814\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 6 - Add some details from the reference photo like the pupils and highlights in the eyes, subtle lines under Selena’s eyes, in the corner of her lips, cheekbone lines, neck and collar lines, etc.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3815\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-457x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"457\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Eyes</h2>\r\nStep 7 - Now, let’s get into a little more of the details. We can start with the eyebrows. It is important to remember that eyebrows do not grow randomly. They have their own direction, so try your best to follow it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3816\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 8 - Now let’s draw eyelashes. As said before with the eyebrows, remember that eyelashes follow a certain direction too. From the center of the eye, the direction changes to the opposite one. Now you can press harder on the pencil, since the harder you press, the darker the value will be. Selena’s eyelashes need to be very dark.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3817\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3818\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 9 - Now start shading the eyes. Add value to the iris of each eye. Also darken the pupils of the eyes, as pupils should be very dark.\r\n\r\nAdditionally, it is slightly darker along the upper part of the whites of the eyes where the upper eyelids cast a shadow below. Do not press too hard on the pencil for this shading.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3819\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Nose</h2>\r\nStep 10 - Shade Selena’s nose, avoiding the white parts you outlined before. Press lightly on the pencil, and try to make strokes all in the same direction.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3820\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 11 - Now layer more shading onto the nose. Try to imitate with strokes the direction and angles of different nose parts.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3821\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows-440x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"440\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Lips</h2>\r\nStep 12 - Repeat Step 10 but shading the lips.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3822\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 13 - Repeat Step 11 but shading the lips. Now you can press harder since lips are darker in value. You can now use pencils like 3B, 4B, 5B and so on. For the example presented in this tutorial, we will use the same pencil (2B) just to show that if you do not have a lot of pencils it is not a problem. Use an eraser to create white shiny parts, imitating lip gloss.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3823\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Face</h2>\r\nStep 14 - Next, shade Selena’s entire face, avoiding white outlined spots.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3824\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 15 - Now it is getting a little trickier. You’ll have to observe with attention the shading on your reference photo and try to put shading on the same spots. Still try not to press too hard on your pencil.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3825\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nIf you have a hard time following the shading on a colored reference photograph, just turn it black and white in any photo editing program. It is important also to put a paper handkerchief or a piece of paper under you drawing hand so as to not smudge your already existing shading and create a mess.\r\n\r\nStep 16 - Continue shading on the other side of the face as well. After you are done, try with light strokes to create a gradient passage from shaded parts to those outlined white spots. Doing so will ensure they won’t stand out as much and will seem more realistic.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3826\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair-444x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"444\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Hair</h2>\r\nStep 17 - Shade the hair, pressing harder on the pencil but not too hard.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3827\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 18 - Imitate shades on the reference photograph.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3829\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nDo not use straight harsh strokes. Instead use curved strokes that imitate the curvature of hair, as seen below. You may wish to use another type of pencil, as mentioned in Step 13.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3828 size-thumbnail\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks-150x150.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"150\" height=\"150\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 19 - Finish shading Selena’s hair. Leave some of the lesser dark parts untouched in some places to imitate shiny, healthy hair. Draw loose strands of hair along the outer edges and along the hairline.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3830\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Completing the Portrait</h2>\r\nStep 20 - Shade the rest of the body with light strokes, using the same pencil that was used for the facial skin tones.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3831\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 21 - Shade the collarbone and other darker parts, always trying to change stroke direction and inclination according to the reference photo. Add details like moles and use an eraser to pull out highlights as needed.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3832\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nLook over your drawing for any necessary fine-tuning or finishing touches. Carefully brush away any residue left behind on your drawing from your eraser.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3833\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-447x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"447\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nAt this point, your drawing should be complete! Hopefully you found this tutorial on how to draw Selena Gomez useful. I trust that you will apply some of the tips from this lesson to some of your future drawings.','How to Draw Selena Gomez','','inherit','closed','closed','','3788-revision-v1','','','2017-10-02 04:54:41','2017-10-02 11:54:41','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3788-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3919,2,'2017-10-02 05:16:13','2017-10-02 12:16:13','If you are a fan of singer Selena Gomez, then you will enjoy this tutorial! Follow along with the following steps to learn how to draw Selena Gomez.\r\n\r\nWe will use the reference photo seen below.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3834 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez-402x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"402\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nYou will need a piece of paper, a pencil, and inspiration of course. For this tutorial we are using Aquarelle paper, which will provide an interesting portrait due to the paper’s thickness and texture. Thick paper is preferred because it is less possible to be torn apart if you use your eraser a lot.\r\n\r\nWe’re using a 2B pencil for this drawing, but for sketching you can also use an HB, B, or any type of H pencil.\r\n<h2>Use Guidelines to Place Facial Features</h2>\r\nStep 1 - Look at the picture and try to outline the main parts like the face oval, eyes, lips, nose, hairline, etc. It will be helpful to try to measure how many times one part of the face can fit in another on your reference photo and then look if your drawing matches it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3810\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline-454x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"454\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThis is a well-known method. For example, how many heads fit in the whole adult body? In our case, we might ask how many times the width of the face can fit in its height. The answer would be roughly one and a half times. You can use this method for other parts of the face as well.\r\n\r\nDo not press too hard on your pencil, because in future steps you will need to get rid of some lines.\r\n\r\nStep 2 - Now try to outline the main parts on the inside of the face. Draw rough boxes and guidelines that properly place the eyes, nose, lips, mouth, and hairline. Maybe add a little bit of line to indicate the shoulders as well. You don’t need to worry about them too much for now, since we are primarily concentrating on the face.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3811\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 3 - Observe the reference photo and try to draw the eyes, nose, and lips as closely to the original as possible in those spaces you outlined before.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3812\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Basic Face Outline and Highlight Placement</h2>\r\nStep 4 - Erase those extra guidelines. Carefully reshape the remaining lines as needed so the form more closely matches Selena’s features. Add some tiny lines that serve as extra details. Some examples include lines above the eyes to indicate the upper eyelids, the outline of the irises, and some small lines on the nose.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3813\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 5 - Look closely at the picture and try to draw, lightly pressing on the pencil, those spots that are the most light and shiny on the face. They will need to stay untouched for most of the time.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3814\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 6 - Add some details from the reference photo like the pupils and highlights in the eyes, subtle lines under Selena’s eyes, in the corner of her lips, cheekbone lines, neck and collar lines, etc.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3815\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-457x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"457\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2>Shading the Eyes</h2>\r\nStep 7 - Now, let’s get into a little more of the details. We can start with the eyebrows. It is important to remember that eyebrows do not grow randomly. They have their own direction, so try your best to follow it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3816\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 8 - Now let’s draw eyelashes. As said before with the eyebrows, remember that eyelashes follow a certain direction too. From the center of the eye, the direction changes to the opposite one. Now you can press harder on the pencil, since the harder you press, the darker the value will be. Selena’s eyelashes need to be very dark.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3817\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3818\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 9 - Now start shading the eyes. Add value to the iris of each eye. Also darken the pupils of the eyes, as pupils should be very dark.\r\n\r\nAdditionally, it is slightly darker along the upper part of the whites of the eyes where the upper eyelids cast a shadow below. Do not press too hard on the pencil for this shading.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3819\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2>Shading the Nose</h2>\r\nStep 10 - Shade Selena’s nose, avoiding the white parts you outlined before. Press lightly on the pencil, and try to make strokes all in the same direction.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3820\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 11 - Now layer more shading onto the nose. Try to imitate with strokes the direction and angles of different nose parts.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3821\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows-440x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"440\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2>Shading the Lips</h2>\r\nStep 12 - Repeat Step 10 but shading the lips.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3822\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 13 - Repeat Step 11 but shading the lips. Now you can press harder since lips are darker in value. You can now use pencils like 3B, 4B, 5B and so on. For the example presented in this tutorial, we will use the same pencil (2B) just to show that if you do not have a lot of pencils it is not a problem. Use an eraser to create white shiny parts, imitating lip gloss.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3823\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Face</h2>\r\nStep 14 - Next, shade Selena’s entire face, avoiding white outlined spots.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3824\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 15 - Now it is getting a little trickier. You’ll have to observe with attention the shading on your reference photo and try to put shading on the same spots. Still try not to press too hard on your pencil.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3825\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nIf you have a hard time following the shading on a colored reference photograph, just turn it black and white in any photo editing program. It is important also to put a paper handkerchief or a piece of paper under you drawing hand so as to not smudge your already existing shading and create a mess.\r\n\r\nStep 16 - Continue shading on the other side of the face as well. After you are done, try with light strokes to create a gradient passage from shaded parts to those outlined white spots. Doing so will ensure they won’t stand out as much and will seem more realistic.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3826\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair-444x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"444\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Hair</h2>\r\nStep 17 - Shade the hair, pressing harder on the pencil but not too hard.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3827\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 18 - Imitate shades on the reference photograph.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3829\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nDo not use straight harsh strokes. Instead use curved strokes that imitate the curvature of hair, as seen below. You may wish to use another type of pencil, as mentioned in Step 13.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3828 size-thumbnail\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks-150x150.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"150\" height=\"150\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 19 - Finish shading Selena’s hair. Leave some of the lesser dark parts untouched in some places to imitate shiny, healthy hair. Draw loose strands of hair along the outer edges and along the hairline.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3830\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Completing the Portrait</h2>\r\nStep 20 - Shade the rest of the body with light strokes, using the same pencil that was used for the facial skin tones.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3831\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 21 - Shade the collarbone and other darker parts, always trying to change stroke direction and inclination according to the reference photo. Add details like moles and use an eraser to pull out highlights as needed.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3832\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nLook over your drawing for any necessary fine-tuning or finishing touches. Carefully brush away any residue left behind on your drawing from your eraser.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3833\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-447x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"447\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nAt this point, your drawing should be complete! Hopefully you found this tutorial on how to draw Selena Gomez useful. I trust that you will apply some of the tips from this lesson to some of your future drawings.','How to Draw Selena Gomez','','inherit','closed','closed','','3788-revision-v1','','','2017-10-02 05:16:13','2017-10-02 12:16:13','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3788-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3915,2,'2017-10-02 05:10:36','2017-10-02 12:10:36','If you are a fan of singer Selena Gomez, then you will enjoy this tutorial! Follow along with the following steps to learn how to draw Selena Gomez.\r\n\r\nWe will use the reference photo seen below.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3834 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez-402x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"402\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nYou will need a piece of paper, a pencil, and inspiration of course. For this tutorial we are using Aquarelle paper, which will provide an interesting portrait due to the paper’s thickness and texture. Thick paper is preferred because it is less possible to be torn apart if you use your eraser a lot.\r\n\r\nWe’re using a 2B pencil for this drawing, but for sketching you can also use an HB, B, or any type of H pencil.\r\n<h2>Use Guidelines to Place Facial Features</h2>\r\nStep 1 - Look at the picture and try to outline the main parts like the face oval, eyes, lips, nose, hairline, etc. It will be helpful to try to measure how many times one part of the face can fit in another on your reference photo and then look if your drawing matches it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3810\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline-454x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"454\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThis is a well-known method. For example, how many heads fit in the whole adult body? In our case, we might ask how many times the width of the face can fit in its height. The answer would be roughly one and a half times. You can use this method for other parts of the face as well.\r\n\r\nDo not press too hard on your pencil, because in future steps you will need to get rid of some lines.\r\n\r\nStep 2 - Now try to outline the main parts on the inside of the face. Draw rough boxes and guidelines that properly place the eyes, nose, lips, mouth, and hairline. Maybe add a little bit of line to indicate the shoulders as well. You don’t need to worry about them too much for now, since we are primarily concentrating on the face.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3811\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 3 - Observe the reference photo and try to draw the eyes, nose, and lips as closely to the original as possible in those spaces you outlined before.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3812\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Basic Face Outline and Highlight Placement</h2>\r\nStep 4 - Erase those extra guidelines. Carefully reshape the remaining lines as needed so the form more closely matches Selena’s features. Add some tiny lines that serve as extra details. Some examples include lines above the eyes to indicate the upper eyelids, the outline of the irises, and some small lines on the nose.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3813\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 5 - Look closely at the picture and try to draw, lightly pressing on the pencil, those spots that are the most light and shiny on the face. They will need to stay untouched for most of the time.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3814\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 6 - Add some details from the reference photo like the pupils and highlights in the eyes, subtle lines under Selena’s eyes, in the corner of her lips, cheekbone lines, neck and collar lines, etc.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3815\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-457x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"457\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Eyes</h2>\r\nStep 7 - Now, let’s get into a little more of the details. We can start with the eyebrows. It is important to remember that eyebrows do not grow randomly. They have their own direction, so try your best to follow it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3816\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 8 - Now let’s draw eyelashes. As said before with the eyebrows, remember that eyelashes follow a certain direction too. From the center of the eye, the direction changes to the opposite one. Now you can press harder on the pencil, since the harder you press, the darker the value will be. Selena’s eyelashes need to be very dark.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3817\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3818\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 9 - Now start shading the eyes. Add value to the iris of each eye. Also darken the pupils of the eyes, as pupils should be very dark.\r\n\r\nAdditionally, it is slightly darker along the upper part of the whites of the eyes where the upper eyelids cast a shadow below. Do not press too hard on the pencil for this shading.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3819\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Nose</h2>\r\nStep 10 - Shade Selena’s nose, avoiding the white parts you outlined before. Press lightly on the pencil, and try to make strokes all in the same direction.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3820\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 11 - Now layer more shading onto the nose. Try to imitate with strokes the direction and angles of different nose parts.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3821\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows-440x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"440\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Lips</h2>\r\nStep 12 - Repeat Step 10 but shading the lips.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3822\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 13 - Repeat Step 11 but shading the lips. Now you can press harder since lips are darker in value. You can now use pencils like 3B, 4B, 5B and so on. For the example presented in this tutorial, we will use the same pencil (2B) just to show that if you do not have a lot of pencils it is not a problem. Use an eraser to create white shiny parts, imitating lip gloss.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3823\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Face</h2>\r\nStep 14 - Next, shade Selena’s entire face, avoiding white outlined spots.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3824\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 15 - Now it is getting a little trickier. You’ll have to observe with attention the shading on your reference photo and try to put shading on the same spots. Still try not to press too hard on your pencil.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3825\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nIf you have a hard time following the shading on a colored reference photograph, just turn it black and white in any photo editing program. It is important also to put a paper handkerchief or a piece of paper under you drawing hand so as to not smudge your already existing shading and create a mess.\r\n\r\nStep 16 - Continue shading on the other side of the face as well. After you are done, try with light strokes to create a gradient passage from shaded parts to those outlined white spots. Doing so will ensure they won’t stand out as much and will seem more realistic.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3826\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair-444x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"444\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Hair</h2>\r\nStep 17 - Shade the hair, pressing harder on the pencil but not too hard.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3827\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 18 - Imitate shades on the reference photograph.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3829\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nDo not use straight harsh strokes. Instead use curved strokes that imitate the curvature of hair, as seen below. You may wish to use another type of pencil, as mentioned in Step 13.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3828 size-thumbnail\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks-150x150.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"150\" height=\"150\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 19 - Finish shading Selena’s hair. Leave some of the lesser dark parts untouched in some places to imitate shiny, healthy hair. Draw loose strands of hair along the outer edges and along the hairline.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3830\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Completing the Portrait</h2>\r\nStep 20 - Shade the rest of the body with light strokes, using the same pencil that was used for the facial skin tones.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3831\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 21 - Shade the collarbone and other darker parts, always trying to change stroke direction and inclination according to the reference photo. Add details like moles and use an eraser to pull out highlights as needed.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3832\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nLook over your drawing for any necessary fine-tuning or finishing touches. Carefully brush away any residue left behind on your drawing from your eraser.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3833\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-447x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"447\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nAt this point, your drawing should be complete! Hopefully you found this tutorial on how to draw Selena Gomez useful. I trust that you will apply some of the tips from this lesson to some of your future drawings.','How to Draw Selena Gomez','','inherit','closed','closed','','3788-revision-v1','','','2017-10-02 05:10:36','2017-10-02 12:10:36','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3788-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3916,2,'2017-10-02 05:11:42','2017-10-02 12:11:42','If you are a fan of singer Selena Gomez, then you will enjoy this tutorial! Follow along with the following steps to learn how to draw Selena Gomez.\r\n\r\nWe will use the reference photo seen below.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3834 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez-402x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"402\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nYou will need a piece of paper, a pencil, and inspiration of course. For this tutorial we are using Aquarelle paper, which will provide an interesting portrait due to the paper’s thickness and texture. Thick paper is preferred because it is less possible to be torn apart if you use your eraser a lot.\r\n\r\nWe’re using a 2B pencil for this drawing, but for sketching you can also use an HB, B, or any type of H pencil.\r\n<h2>Use Guidelines to Place Facial Features</h2>\r\nStep 1 - Look at the picture and try to outline the main parts like the face oval, eyes, lips, nose, hairline, etc. It will be helpful to try to measure how many times one part of the face can fit in another on your reference photo and then look if your drawing matches it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3810\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline-454x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"454\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThis is a well-known method. For example, how many heads fit in the whole adult body? In our case, we might ask how many times the width of the face can fit in its height. The answer would be roughly one and a half times. You can use this method for other parts of the face as well.\r\n\r\nDo not press too hard on your pencil, because in future steps you will need to get rid of some lines.\r\n\r\nStep 2 - Now try to outline the main parts on the inside of the face. Draw rough boxes and guidelines that properly place the eyes, nose, lips, mouth, and hairline. Maybe add a little bit of line to indicate the shoulders as well. You don’t need to worry about them too much for now, since we are primarily concentrating on the face.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3811\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 3 - Observe the reference photo and try to draw the eyes, nose, and lips as closely to the original as possible in those spaces you outlined before.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3812\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2>Basic Face Outline and Highlight Placement</h2>\r\nStep 4 - Erase those extra guidelines. Carefully reshape the remaining lines as needed so the form more closely matches Selena’s features. Add some tiny lines that serve as extra details. Some examples include lines above the eyes to indicate the upper eyelids, the outline of the irises, and some small lines on the nose.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3813\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 5 - Look closely at the picture and try to draw, lightly pressing on the pencil, those spots that are the most light and shiny on the face. They will need to stay untouched for most of the time.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3814\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 6 - Add some details from the reference photo like the pupils and highlights in the eyes, subtle lines under Selena’s eyes, in the corner of her lips, cheekbone lines, neck and collar lines, etc.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3815\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-457x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"457\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Eyes</h2>\r\nStep 7 - Now, let’s get into a little more of the details. We can start with the eyebrows. It is important to remember that eyebrows do not grow randomly. They have their own direction, so try your best to follow it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3816\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 8 - Now let’s draw eyelashes. As said before with the eyebrows, remember that eyelashes follow a certain direction too. From the center of the eye, the direction changes to the opposite one. Now you can press harder on the pencil, since the harder you press, the darker the value will be. Selena’s eyelashes need to be very dark.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3817\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3818\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 9 - Now start shading the eyes. Add value to the iris of each eye. Also darken the pupils of the eyes, as pupils should be very dark.\r\n\r\nAdditionally, it is slightly darker along the upper part of the whites of the eyes where the upper eyelids cast a shadow below. Do not press too hard on the pencil for this shading.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3819\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Nose</h2>\r\nStep 10 - Shade Selena’s nose, avoiding the white parts you outlined before. Press lightly on the pencil, and try to make strokes all in the same direction.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3820\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 11 - Now layer more shading onto the nose. Try to imitate with strokes the direction and angles of different nose parts.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3821\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows-440x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"440\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Lips</h2>\r\nStep 12 - Repeat Step 10 but shading the lips.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3822\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 13 - Repeat Step 11 but shading the lips. Now you can press harder since lips are darker in value. You can now use pencils like 3B, 4B, 5B and so on. For the example presented in this tutorial, we will use the same pencil (2B) just to show that if you do not have a lot of pencils it is not a problem. Use an eraser to create white shiny parts, imitating lip gloss.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3823\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Face</h2>\r\nStep 14 - Next, shade Selena’s entire face, avoiding white outlined spots.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3824\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 15 - Now it is getting a little trickier. You’ll have to observe with attention the shading on your reference photo and try to put shading on the same spots. Still try not to press too hard on your pencil.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3825\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nIf you have a hard time following the shading on a colored reference photograph, just turn it black and white in any photo editing program. It is important also to put a paper handkerchief or a piece of paper under you drawing hand so as to not smudge your already existing shading and create a mess.\r\n\r\nStep 16 - Continue shading on the other side of the face as well. After you are done, try with light strokes to create a gradient passage from shaded parts to those outlined white spots. Doing so will ensure they won’t stand out as much and will seem more realistic.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3826\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair-444x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"444\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Hair</h2>\r\nStep 17 - Shade the hair, pressing harder on the pencil but not too hard.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3827\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 18 - Imitate shades on the reference photograph.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3829\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nDo not use straight harsh strokes. Instead use curved strokes that imitate the curvature of hair, as seen below. You may wish to use another type of pencil, as mentioned in Step 13.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3828 size-thumbnail\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks-150x150.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"150\" height=\"150\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 19 - Finish shading Selena’s hair. Leave some of the lesser dark parts untouched in some places to imitate shiny, healthy hair. Draw loose strands of hair along the outer edges and along the hairline.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3830\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Completing the Portrait</h2>\r\nStep 20 - Shade the rest of the body with light strokes, using the same pencil that was used for the facial skin tones.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3831\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 21 - Shade the collarbone and other darker parts, always trying to change stroke direction and inclination according to the reference photo. Add details like moles and use an eraser to pull out highlights as needed.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3832\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nLook over your drawing for any necessary fine-tuning or finishing touches. Carefully brush away any residue left behind on your drawing from your eraser.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3833\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-447x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"447\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nAt this point, your drawing should be complete! Hopefully you found this tutorial on how to draw Selena Gomez useful. I trust that you will apply some of the tips from this lesson to some of your future drawings.','How to Draw Selena Gomez','','inherit','closed','closed','','3788-revision-v1','','','2017-10-02 05:11:42','2017-10-02 12:11:42','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3788-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3917,2,'2017-10-02 05:12:26','2017-10-02 12:12:26','If you are a fan of singer Selena Gomez, then you will enjoy this tutorial! Follow along with the following steps to learn how to draw Selena Gomez.\r\n\r\nWe will use the reference photo seen below.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3834 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez-402x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"402\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nYou will need a piece of paper, a pencil, and inspiration of course. For this tutorial we are using Aquarelle paper, which will provide an interesting portrait due to the paper’s thickness and texture. Thick paper is preferred because it is less possible to be torn apart if you use your eraser a lot.\r\n\r\nWe’re using a 2B pencil for this drawing, but for sketching you can also use an HB, B, or any type of H pencil.\r\n<h2>Use Guidelines to Place Facial Features</h2>\r\nStep 1 - Look at the picture and try to outline the main parts like the face oval, eyes, lips, nose, hairline, etc. It will be helpful to try to measure how many times one part of the face can fit in another on your reference photo and then look if your drawing matches it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3810\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline-454x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"454\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThis is a well-known method. For example, how many heads fit in the whole adult body? In our case, we might ask how many times the width of the face can fit in its height. The answer would be roughly one and a half times. You can use this method for other parts of the face as well.\r\n\r\nDo not press too hard on your pencil, because in future steps you will need to get rid of some lines.\r\n\r\nStep 2 - Now try to outline the main parts on the inside of the face. Draw rough boxes and guidelines that properly place the eyes, nose, lips, mouth, and hairline. Maybe add a little bit of line to indicate the shoulders as well. You don’t need to worry about them too much for now, since we are primarily concentrating on the face.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3811\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 3 - Observe the reference photo and try to draw the eyes, nose, and lips as closely to the original as possible in those spaces you outlined before.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3812\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Basic Face Outline and Highlight Placement</h2>\r\nStep 4 - Erase those extra guidelines. Carefully reshape the remaining lines as needed so the form more closely matches Selena’s features. Add some tiny lines that serve as extra details. Some examples include lines above the eyes to indicate the upper eyelids, the outline of the irises, and some small lines on the nose.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3813\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 5 - Look closely at the picture and try to draw, lightly pressing on the pencil, those spots that are the most light and shiny on the face. They will need to stay untouched for most of the time.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3814\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 6 - Add some details from the reference photo like the pupils and highlights in the eyes, subtle lines under Selena’s eyes, in the corner of her lips, cheekbone lines, neck and collar lines, etc.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3815\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-457x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"457\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Eyes</h2>\r\nStep 7 - Now, let’s get into a little more of the details. We can start with the eyebrows. It is important to remember that eyebrows do not grow randomly. They have their own direction, so try your best to follow it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3816\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 8 - Now let’s draw eyelashes. As said before with the eyebrows, remember that eyelashes follow a certain direction too. From the center of the eye, the direction changes to the opposite one. Now you can press harder on the pencil, since the harder you press, the darker the value will be. Selena’s eyelashes need to be very dark.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3817\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3818\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 9 - Now start shading the eyes. Add value to the iris of each eye. Also darken the pupils of the eyes, as pupils should be very dark.\r\n\r\nAdditionally, it is slightly darker along the upper part of the whites of the eyes where the upper eyelids cast a shadow below. Do not press too hard on the pencil for this shading.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3819\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Nose</h2>\r\nStep 10 - Shade Selena’s nose, avoiding the white parts you outlined before. Press lightly on the pencil, and try to make strokes all in the same direction.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3820\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 11 - Now layer more shading onto the nose. Try to imitate with strokes the direction and angles of different nose parts.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3821\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows-440x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"440\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Lips</h2>\r\nStep 12 - Repeat Step 10 but shading the lips.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3822\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 13 - Repeat Step 11 but shading the lips. Now you can press harder since lips are darker in value. You can now use pencils like 3B, 4B, 5B and so on. For the example presented in this tutorial, we will use the same pencil (2B) just to show that if you do not have a lot of pencils it is not a problem. Use an eraser to create white shiny parts, imitating lip gloss.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3823\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Face</h2>\r\nStep 14 - Next, shade Selena’s entire face, avoiding white outlined spots.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3824\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 15 - Now it is getting a little trickier. You’ll have to observe with attention the shading on your reference photo and try to put shading on the same spots. Still try not to press too hard on your pencil.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3825\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nIf you have a hard time following the shading on a colored reference photograph, just turn it black and white in any photo editing program. It is important also to put a paper handkerchief or a piece of paper under you drawing hand so as to not smudge your already existing shading and create a mess.\r\n\r\nStep 16 - Continue shading on the other side of the face as well. After you are done, try with light strokes to create a gradient passage from shaded parts to those outlined white spots. Doing so will ensure they won’t stand out as much and will seem more realistic.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3826\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair-444x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"444\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Hair</h2>\r\nStep 17 - Shade the hair, pressing harder on the pencil but not too hard.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3827\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 18 - Imitate shades on the reference photograph.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3829\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nDo not use straight harsh strokes. Instead use curved strokes that imitate the curvature of hair, as seen below. You may wish to use another type of pencil, as mentioned in Step 13.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3828 size-thumbnail\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks-150x150.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"150\" height=\"150\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 19 - Finish shading Selena’s hair. Leave some of the lesser dark parts untouched in some places to imitate shiny, healthy hair. Draw loose strands of hair along the outer edges and along the hairline.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3830\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Completing the Portrait</h2>\r\nStep 20 - Shade the rest of the body with light strokes, using the same pencil that was used for the facial skin tones.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3831\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 21 - Shade the collarbone and other darker parts, always trying to change stroke direction and inclination according to the reference photo. Add details like moles and use an eraser to pull out highlights as needed.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3832\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nLook over your drawing for any necessary fine-tuning or finishing touches. Carefully brush away any residue left behind on your drawing from your eraser.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3833\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-447x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"447\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nAt this point, your drawing should be complete! Hopefully you found this tutorial on how to draw Selena Gomez useful. I trust that you will apply some of the tips from this lesson to some of your future drawings.','How to Draw Selena Gomez','','inherit','closed','closed','','3788-revision-v1','','','2017-10-02 05:12:26','2017-10-02 12:12:26','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3788-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3918,2,'2017-10-02 05:15:09','2017-10-02 12:15:09','If you are a fan of singer Selena Gomez, then you will enjoy this tutorial! Follow along with the following steps to learn how to draw Selena Gomez.\r\n\r\nWe will use the reference photo seen below.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3834 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez-402x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"402\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nYou will need a piece of paper, a pencil, and inspiration of course. For this tutorial we are using Aquarelle paper, which will provide an interesting portrait due to the paper’s thickness and texture. Thick paper is preferred because it is less possible to be torn apart if you use your eraser a lot.\r\n\r\nWe’re using a 2B pencil for this drawing, but for sketching you can also use an HB, B, or any type of H pencil.\r\n<h2>Use Guidelines to Place Facial Features</h2>\r\nStep 1 - Look at the picture and try to outline the main parts like the face oval, eyes, lips, nose, hairline, etc. It will be helpful to try to measure how many times one part of the face can fit in another on your reference photo and then look if your drawing matches it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3810\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline-454x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"454\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThis is a well-known method. For example, how many heads fit in the whole adult body? In our case, we might ask how many times the width of the face can fit in its height. The answer would be roughly one and a half times. You can use this method for other parts of the face as well.\r\n\r\nDo not press too hard on your pencil, because in future steps you will need to get rid of some lines.\r\n\r\nStep 2 - Now try to outline the main parts on the inside of the face. Draw rough boxes and guidelines that properly place the eyes, nose, lips, mouth, and hairline. Maybe add a little bit of line to indicate the shoulders as well. You don’t need to worry about them too much for now, since we are primarily concentrating on the face.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3811\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 3 - Observe the reference photo and try to draw the eyes, nose, and lips as closely to the original as possible in those spaces you outlined before.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3812\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2>Basic Face Outline and Highlight Placement</h2>\r\nStep 4 - Erase those extra guidelines. Carefully reshape the remaining lines as needed so the form more closely matches Selena’s features. Add some tiny lines that serve as extra details. Some examples include lines above the eyes to indicate the upper eyelids, the outline of the irises, and some small lines on the nose.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3813\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 5 - Look closely at the picture and try to draw, lightly pressing on the pencil, those spots that are the most light and shiny on the face. They will need to stay untouched for most of the time.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3814\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 6 - Add some details from the reference photo like the pupils and highlights in the eyes, subtle lines under Selena’s eyes, in the corner of her lips, cheekbone lines, neck and collar lines, etc.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3815\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-457x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"457\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2>Shading the Eyes</h2>\r\nStep 7 - Now, let’s get into a little more of the details. We can start with the eyebrows. It is important to remember that eyebrows do not grow randomly. They have their own direction, so try your best to follow it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3816\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 8 - Now let’s draw eyelashes. As said before with the eyebrows, remember that eyelashes follow a certain direction too. From the center of the eye, the direction changes to the opposite one. Now you can press harder on the pencil, since the harder you press, the darker the value will be. Selena’s eyelashes need to be very dark.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3817\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3818\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 9 - Now start shading the eyes. Add value to the iris of each eye. Also darken the pupils of the eyes, as pupils should be very dark.\r\n\r\nAdditionally, it is slightly darker along the upper part of the whites of the eyes where the upper eyelids cast a shadow below. Do not press too hard on the pencil for this shading.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3819\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2>Shading the Nose</h2>\r\nStep 10 - Shade Selena’s nose, avoiding the white parts you outlined before. Press lightly on the pencil, and try to make strokes all in the same direction.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3820\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 11 - Now layer more shading onto the nose. Try to imitate with strokes the direction and angles of different nose parts.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3821\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows-440x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"440\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2></h2>\r\n<h2>Shading the Lips</h2>\r\nStep 12 - Repeat Step 10 but shading the lips.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3822\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 13 - Repeat Step 11 but shading the lips. Now you can press harder since lips are darker in value. You can now use pencils like 3B, 4B, 5B and so on. For the example presented in this tutorial, we will use the same pencil (2B) just to show that if you do not have a lot of pencils it is not a problem. Use an eraser to create white shiny parts, imitating lip gloss.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3823\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Face</h2>\r\nStep 14 - Next, shade Selena’s entire face, avoiding white outlined spots.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3824\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 15 - Now it is getting a little trickier. You’ll have to observe with attention the shading on your reference photo and try to put shading on the same spots. Still try not to press too hard on your pencil.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3825\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nIf you have a hard time following the shading on a colored reference photograph, just turn it black and white in any photo editing program. It is important also to put a paper handkerchief or a piece of paper under you drawing hand so as to not smudge your already existing shading and create a mess.\r\n\r\nStep 16 - Continue shading on the other side of the face as well. After you are done, try with light strokes to create a gradient passage from shaded parts to those outlined white spots. Doing so will ensure they won’t stand out as much and will seem more realistic.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3826\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair-444x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"444\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Shading the Hair</h2>\r\nStep 17 - Shade the hair, pressing harder on the pencil but not too hard.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3827\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 18 - Imitate shades on the reference photograph.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3829\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nDo not use straight harsh strokes. Instead use curved strokes that imitate the curvature of hair, as seen below. You may wish to use another type of pencil, as mentioned in Step 13.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3828 size-thumbnail\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks-150x150.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"150\" height=\"150\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 19 - Finish shading Selena’s hair. Leave some of the lesser dark parts untouched in some places to imitate shiny, healthy hair. Draw loose strands of hair along the outer edges and along the hairline.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3830\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Completing the Portrait</h2>\r\nStep 20 - Shade the rest of the body with light strokes, using the same pencil that was used for the facial skin tones.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3831\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nStep 21 - Shade the collarbone and other darker parts, always trying to change stroke direction and inclination according to the reference photo. Add details like moles and use an eraser to pull out highlights as needed.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3832\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nLook over your drawing for any necessary fine-tuning or finishing touches. Carefully brush away any residue left behind on your drawing from your eraser.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3833\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-447x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"447\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nAt this point, your drawing should be complete! Hopefully you found this tutorial on how to draw Selena Gomez useful. I trust that you will apply some of the tips from this lesson to some of your future drawings.','How to Draw Selena Gomez','','inherit','closed','closed','','3788-revision-v1','','','2017-10-02 05:15:09','2017-10-02 12:15:09','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3788-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3920,2,'2017-10-02 05:21:44','2017-10-02 12:21:44','If you are a fan of singer Selena Gomez, then you will enjoy this tutorial! Follow along with the following steps to learn how to draw Selena Gomez.\r\n\r\nWe will use the reference photo seen below.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3834 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/ref-selena-gomez-402x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"402\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nYou will need a piece of paper, a pencil, and inspiration of course. For this tutorial we are using Aquarelle paper, which will provide an interesting portrait due to the paper’s thickness and texture. Thick paper is preferred because it is less possible to be torn apart if you use your eraser a lot.\r\n\r\nWe’re using a 2B pencil for this drawing, but for sketching you can also use an HB, B, or any type of H pencil.\r\n<h2>Use Guidelines to Place Facial Features</h2>\r\nStep 1 - Look at the picture and try to outline the main parts like the face oval, eyes, lips, nose, hairline, etc. It will be helpful to try to measure how many times one part of the face can fit in another on your reference photo and then look if your drawing matches it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3810\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/01-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Outline-454x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"454\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThis is a well-known method. For example, how many heads fit in the whole adult body? In our case, we might ask how many times the width of the face can fit in its height. The answer would be roughly one and a half times. You can use this method for other parts of the face as well.\r\n\r\nDo not press too hard on your pencil, because in future steps you will need to get rid of some lines.\r\n\r\nStep 2 - Now try to outline the main parts on the inside of the face. Draw rough boxes and guidelines that properly place the eyes, nose, lips, mouth, and hairline. Maybe add a little bit of line to indicate the shoulders as well. You don’t need to worry about them too much for now, since we are primarily concentrating on the face.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3811\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/02-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-plan-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 3 - Observe the reference photo and try to draw the eyes, nose, and lips as closely to the original as possible in those spaces you outlined before.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3812\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/03-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-facial-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Basic Face Outline and Highlight Placement</h2>\r\nStep 4 - Erase those extra guidelines. Carefully reshape the remaining lines as needed so the form more closely matches Selena’s features. Add some tiny lines that serve as extra details. Some examples include lines above the eyes to indicate the upper eyelids, the outline of the irises, and some small lines on the nose.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3813\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/04-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-rough-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 5 - Look closely at the picture and try to draw, lightly pressing on the pencil, those spots that are the most light and shiny on the face. They will need to stay untouched for most of the time.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3814\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/05-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-expression-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 6 - Add some details from the reference photo like the pupils and highlights in the eyes, subtle lines under Selena’s eyes, in the corner of her lips, cheekbone lines, neck and collar lines, etc.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3815\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/06-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-457x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"457\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Shading the Eyes</h2>\r\nStep 7 - Now, let’s get into a little more of the details. We can start with the eyebrows. It is important to remember that eyebrows do not grow randomly. They have their own direction, so try your best to follow it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3816\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/07-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-details-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 8 - Now let’s draw eyelashes. As said before with the eyebrows, remember that eyelashes follow a certain direction too. From the center of the eye, the direction changes to the opposite one. Now you can press harder on the pencil, since the harder you press, the darker the value will be. Selena’s eyelashes need to be very dark.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3817\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/08-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Left-face-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3818\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/8.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyes-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 9 - Now start shading the eyes. Add value to the iris of each eye. Also darken the pupils of the eyes, as pupils should be very dark.\r\n\r\nAdditionally, it is slightly darker along the upper part of the whites of the eyes where the upper eyelids cast a shadow below. Do not press too hard on the pencil for this shading.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3819\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/09-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Shading the Nose</h2>\r\nStep 10 - Shade Selena’s nose, avoiding the white parts you outlined before. Press lightly on the pencil, and try to make strokes all in the same direction.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3820\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/10-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Nose-Outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 11 - Now layer more shading onto the nose. Try to imitate with strokes the direction and angles of different nose parts.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3821\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/11-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Eyebrows-440x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"440\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Shading the Lips</h2>\r\nStep 12 - Repeat Step 10 but shading the lips.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3822\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/12-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Lips-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 13 - Repeat Step 11 but shading the lips. Now you can press harder since lips are darker in value. You can now use pencils like 3B, 4B, 5B and so on. For the example presented in this tutorial, we will use the same pencil (2B) just to show that if you do not have a lot of pencils it is not a problem. Use an eraser to create white shiny parts, imitating lip gloss.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3823\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/13-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-lips-final-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Shading the Face</h2>\r\nStep 14 - Next, shade Selena’s entire face, avoiding white outlined spots.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3824\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/14-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-head-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 15 - Now it is getting a little trickier. You’ll have to observe with attention the shading on your reference photo and try to put shading on the same spots. Still try not to press too hard on your pencil.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3825\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/15-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nIf you have a hard time following the shading on a colored reference photograph, just turn it black and white in any photo editing program. It is important also to put a paper handkerchief or a piece of paper under you drawing hand so as to not smudge your already existing shading and create a mess.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 16 - Continue shading on the other side of the face as well. After you are done, try with light strokes to create a gradient passage from shaded parts to those outlined white spots. Doing so will ensure they won’t stand out as much and will seem more realistic.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3826\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/16-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Hair-444x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"444\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Shading the Hair</h2>\r\nStep 17 - Shade the hair, pressing harder on the pencil but not too hard.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3827\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/17-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Ears-and-Hair-completed-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 18 - Imitate shades on the reference photograph.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3829\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-left-head-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nDo not use straight harsh strokes. Instead use curved strokes that imitate the curvature of hair, as seen below. You may wish to use another type of pencil, as mentioned in Step 13.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3828 size-thumbnail\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/18.2-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-marks-150x150.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"150\" height=\"150\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 19 - Finish shading Selena’s hair. Leave some of the lesser dark parts untouched in some places to imitate shiny, healthy hair. Draw loose strands of hair along the outer edges and along the hairline.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3830\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/19-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Facial-final-stage-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Completing the Portrait</h2>\r\nStep 20 - Shade the rest of the body with light strokes, using the same pencil that was used for the facial skin tones.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3831\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/20-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Dress-outline-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nStep 21 - Shade the collarbone and other darker parts, always trying to change stroke direction and inclination according to the reference photo. Add details like moles and use an eraser to pull out highlights as needed.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3832\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/21-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-sketch-450x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"450\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nLook over your drawing for any necessary fine-tuning or finishing touches. Carefully brush away any residue left behind on your drawing from your eraser.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3833\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/10/22-How-to-draw-Selena-Gomez-Final-447x600.jpg\" alt=\"\" width=\"447\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nAt this point, your drawing should be complete! Hopefully you found this tutorial on how to draw Selena Gomez useful. I trust that you will apply some of the tips from this lesson to some of your future drawings.','How to Draw Selena Gomez','','inherit','closed','closed','','3788-revision-v1','','','2017-10-02 05:21:44','2017-10-02 12:21:44','',3788,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3788-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),